The Story of Eclipses George F. Chambers 1303 downloads.pdf

The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Story of Eclipses

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.

Title: The Story of Eclipses

Author: George F. Chambers

Release date: January 10, 2008 [eBook #24222]

Language: English

Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/24222

Credits: Produced by Eric Hutton, Markus Brenner and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE STORY OF
ECLIPSES ***

THE STORY OF ECLIPSES

SIMPLY TOLD FOR GENERAL READERS.

WITH ESPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE TOTAL ECLIPSE
OF THE SUN OF MAY 28, 1900.

BY

GEORGE F. CHAMBERS, F.R.A.S.
Of the Inner Temple, Barrister-at-Law.

AUTHOR OF
“THE STORY OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM”; “THE STORY OF THE STARS”;
“A HANDBOOK OF DESCRIPTIVE ASTRONOMY,” ETC.

LONDON: GEORGE NEWNES, LTD.
SOUTHAMPTON STREET, STRAND
1899.

The rights of translation and of reproduction are reserved.

Fig. 1.—The Total Eclipse of the Sun, Sept. 7, 1858
(Liais).

PREFACE.

The present Volume is intended as a sequel to my two former volumes in
the Newnes Series of “Useful Stories,” entitled respectively the “Story of
the Solar System,” and the “Story of the Stars.” It has been written not only
as a necessary complement, so to speak, to those works, but because public
attention is already being directed to the forthcoming total eclipse of the
Sun on May 28, 1900. This eclipse, though only visible as a partial one in
England, will be total no further off than Portugal and Spain. Considering
also that the line of totality will pass across a large tract of country forming
part of the United States, it may be inferred that there will be an enormous
number of English-speaking spectators of the phenomenon. It is for these in
general that this little book has been written. For the guidance of those who
may be expected to visit Portugal or Spain, a temporary Appendix has been
prepared, giving a large amount of information showing how those
countries can be best reached, whether by sea or overland, from the shores
of England.
If anyone is inclined to doubt whether an eclipse expedition is likely to
provide non-astronomical tourists with incidents of travel, pleasant,
profitable, and even amusing, perhaps the doubt will be removed by a
perusal of the accounts of Sir F. Galton’s trip to Spain in 1860 (Vacation
Tourists in 1860, p. 422), or of Professor Tyndall’s trip to Algeria in 1870
(Hours of Exercise in the Alps, p. 429), or of Professor Langley’s
Adventures on Pike’s Peak in the Rocky Mountains, Colorado, U.S., in
1878 (Washington Observations, 1876, Appendix III. p. 203); or of some of
the many Magazine and other narratives of the Norway eclipse of 1896 and
the Indian eclipse of 1898.
Subject to these special points no further prefatory explanation seems
needed, the general style of the contents being, mutatis mutandis, identical
with the contents of the Volumes which have gone before.
I have to thank my friend, Dr. A. M. W. Downing, the Superintendent of
the Nautical Almanac, for kindly verifying the calculations in chapters II.
and III.
G. F. C.

Northfield Grange,
Eastbourne, 1899.

CONTENTS.
CHAP. PAGE
I. INTRODUCTION 9
II. GENERAL IDEAS 11
III. THE SAROS AND THE PERIODICITY OF ECLIPSES 18
IV. MISCELLANEOUS THEORETICAL MATTERS
CONNECTED WITH ECLIPSES OF THE SUN
(CHIEFLY) 34
V. WHAT IS OBSERVED DURING THE EARLIER
STAGES OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN 40
The Moon’s Shadow and the Darkness it causes 41
Shadow Bands 46
The Approach of Totality 49
The Darkness of Totality 53
Meteorological and other effects 54
VI. WHAT IS OBSERVED DURING THE TOTAL PHASE
OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN 56
Baily’s Beads 57
The Corona 62
VII. WHAT IS OBSERVED AFTER THE TOTAL PHASE OF
AN ECLIPSE OF THE SUN IS AT AN END 73
VIII. ECLIPSES OF THE SUN MENTIONED IN HISTORY—
CHINESE 75
IX. ARE ECLIPSES ALLUDED TO IN THE BIBLE 86
X. ECLIPSES MENTIONED IN HISTORY—CLASSICAL 107
XI. ECLIPSES MENTIONED IN HISTORY—THE
CHRISTIAN ERA TO THE NORMAN CONQUEST 128

XII. ECLIPSES MENTIONED IN HISTORY—MEDIÆVAL
AND MODERN 145
XIII. ECLIPSES MENTIONED IN HISTORY—NINETEENTH
CENTURY 162
XIV. THE ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH AS APPLIED TO
ECLIPSES OF THE SUN 179
XV. ECLIPSES OF THE MOON—GENERAL PRINCIPLES 186
XVI. ECLIPSES OF THE MOON MENTIONED IN HISTORY 197
XVII. CATALOGUES OF ECLIPSES: AND THEIR
CALCULATION 218
XVIII. STRANGE ECLIPSE CUSTOMS 224
XIX. ECLIPSES IN SHAKESPEARE AND THE POETS 229
XX. BRIEF HINTS TO OBSERVERS OF ECLIPSES 233
XXI. TRANSITS AND OCCULTATIONS 235
APPENDIX—INFORMATION RESPECTING THE TOTAL
ECLIPSE OF MAY 28, 1900, FOR TRAVELLERS VISITING
PORTUGAL AND SPAIN 239

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
PAGE
FIG. 1. TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN, SEPTEMBER
7, 1858 Frontispiece
" 2. THEORY OF TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN 14
" 3. THEORY OF AN ANNULAR ECLIPSE OF
THE SUN 15
" 4. ANNULAR ECLIPSE OF THE SUN 17
" 5. PARTIAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN 17
" 6. SHADOW BANDS 47
" 7. RAYS OF LIGHT SEEN DURING TOTALITY 49
" 8. BRUSHES OF LIGHT 57
" 9. “BAILY’S BEADS,” FOUR STAGES, AT
BRIEF INTERVALS (MAY 15, 1836) 58
" 10. CORONA OF 1882. SUN-SPOT MAXIMUM 68
" 11. CORONA OF 1867. SUN-SPOT MINIMUM 70
" 12. ECLIPSE OF JAN. 11, 689 B.C. AT
JERUSALEM 100
" 13. THEORY OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE MOON 187
" 14. CONDITIONS OF ECLIPSES OF THE MOON 189
" 15. OCCULTATION OF JUPITER, AUG. 7, 1889
(IMMERSION) 237
" 16. OCCULTATION OF JUPITER, AUG. 7, 1889
(IMMERSION) 237
" 17. OCCULTATION OF JUPITER, AUG. 7, 1889
(EMERSION) 238

" 18. OCCULTATION OF JUPITER, AUG. 7, 1889
(EMERSION) 238
" 19. PATH OF THE TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN at end of
OF MAY 28, 1900 book.

THE STORY OF ECLIPSES.

CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTION.

It may, I fear, be taken as a truism that “the man in the street” (collectively,
the “general public”) knows little and cares less for what is called physical
science. Now and again when something remarkable happens, such as a
great thunderstorm, or an earthquake, or a volcanic eruption, or a brilliant
comet, or a total eclipse, something in fact which has become the talk of the
town, our friend will condescend to give the matter the barest amount of
attention, whilst he is filling his pipe or mixing a whisky and soda; but there
is not in England that general attention given to the displays of nature and
the philosophy of those displays, which certainly is a characteristic of the
phlegmatic German. However, things are better than they used to be, and
the forthcoming total eclipse of the Sun of May 28, 1900 (visible as it will
be as a partial eclipse all over Great Britain and Ireland, and as a total
eclipse in countries so near to Great Britain as Spain and Portugal, to say
nothing of the United States), will probably not only attract a good deal of
attention on the part of many millions of English-speaking people, but may
also be expected to induce a numerically respectable remnant to give their
minds and thoughts, with a certain amount of patient attention, to the
Science and Philosophy of Eclipses.
There are other causes likely to co-operate in bringing this about. It is
true that men’s minds are more enlightened at the end of the 19th century
than they were at the end of the 16th century, and that a trip to Spain will
awaken vastly different thoughts in the year 1900 to those which would
have been awakened, say in the year 1587; but for all that, a certain amount
of superstition still lingers in the world, and total eclipses as well as comets
still give rise to feelings of anxiety and alarm amongst ill-educated villagers
even in so-called civilized countries. Some amusing illustrations of this will
be presented in due course. For the moment let me content myself by
stating the immediate aim of this little book, and the circumstances which

have led to its being written. What those circumstances are will be
understood generally from what has been said already. Its aim is the
unambitious one of presenting in readable yet sound scientific language a
popular account of eclipses of the Sun and Moon, and (very briefly) of
certain kindred astronomical phenomena which depend upon causes in
some degree similar to those which operate in connection with eclipses.
These kindred phenomena are technically known as “Transits” and
“Occultations.” Putting these two matters entirely aside for the present, we
will confine our attention in the first instance to eclipses; and as eclipses of
the Sun do not stand quite on the same footing as eclipses of the Moon, we
will, after stating the general circumstances of the case, put the eclipses of
the Moon aside for a while.

CHAPTER II.
GENERAL IDEAS.

The primary meaning of the word “Eclipse” (ἔϰλειψις) is a forsaking,
quitting, or disappearance. Hence the covering over of something by
something else, or the immersion of something in something; and these
apparently crude definitions will be found on investigation to represent
precisely the facts of the case.
Inasmuch as the Earth and the Moon are for our present purpose
practically “solid bodies,” each must cast a shadow into space as the result
of being illuminated by the Sun, regarded as a source of light. What we
shall eventually have to consider is: What results arise from the existence of
these shadows according to the circumstances under which they are
viewed? But before reaching this point, some other preliminary
considerations must be dealt with.
The various bodies which together make up the Solar system, that is to
say, in particular, those bodies called the “planets”—some of them
“primary,” others “secondary” (alias “Satellites” or “Moons”)—are
constantly in motion. Consequently, if we imagine a line to be drawn
between any two at any given time, such a line will point in a different
direction at another time, and so it may occasionally happen that three of
these ever-moving bodies will come into one and the same straight line.
Now the consequences of this state of things were admirably well pointed
out nearly half a century ago by a popular writer, who in his day greatly
aided the development of science amongst the masses. “When one of the
extremes of the series of three bodies which thus assume a common
direction is the Sun, the intermediate body deprives the other extreme body,
either wholly or partially, of the illumination which it habitually receives.

When one of the extremes is the Earth, the intermediate body intercepts,
wholly or partially, the other extreme body from the view of the observers
situate at places on the Earth which are in the common line of direction, and
the intermediate body is seen to pass over the other extreme body as it
enters upon or leaves the common line of direction. The phenomena
resulting from such contingencies of position and direction are variously
denominated Eclipses, Transits, and Occultations, according to the relative
apparent magnitudes of the interposing and obscured bodies, and according
to the circumstances which attend them.”[1]
The Earth moves round the Sun once in every year; the Moon moves
round the Earth once in every lunar month (27 days). I hope everybody
understands those essential facts. Then we must note that the Earth moves
round the Sun in a certain plane (it is nothing for our present purpose what
that plane is). If the Moon as the Earth’s companion moved round the Earth
in the same plane, an eclipse of the Sun would happen regularly every
month when the Moon was in “Conjunction” (“New Moon”), and also
every month at the intermediate period there would be a total eclipse of the
Moon on the occasion of every “Opposition” (or “Full Moon”). But
inasmuch as the Moon’s orbit does not lie in quite the same plane as the
Earth’s, but is inclined thereto at an angle which may be taken to average
about 5⅛°, the actual facts are different; that is to say, instead of there being
in every year about 25 eclipses (solar and lunar in nearly equal numbers),
which there would be if the orbits had identical planes, there are only a very
few eclipses in the year, never, under the most favourable circumstances,
more than 7, and sometimes as few as 2. Nor are the numbers equally
apportioned. In years where there are 7 eclipses, 5 of them may be of the
Sun and 2 of the Moon; where there are only 2 eclipses, both must be of the
Sun. Under no circumstances can there be in any one year more than 3
eclipses of the Moon, and in some years there will be none. The reasons for
these diversities are of a technical character, and a full elucidation of them
would not be of interest to the general reader. It may here be added,
parenthetically, that the occasions will be very rare of there being 5 solar
eclipses in one year. This last happened in 1823,[2] and will only happen
once again in the next two centuries, namely in 1935. If a total eclipse of
the Sun happens early in January there may be another in December of the
same year, as in 1889 (Jan. 1 and Dec. 22). This will not happen again till

2057, when there will be total eclipses on Jan. 5 and Dec. 26. There is one
very curious fact which may be here conveniently stated as a bare fact,
reserving the explanation of it for a future page, namely, that eclipses of the
Sun and Moon are linked together in a certain chain or sequence which
takes rather more than 18 years to run out when the sequence recurs and
recurs ad infinitum. In this 18-year period, which bears the name of the
“Saros,” there usually happen 70 eclipses, of which 41 are of the Sun and
29 of the Moon. Accordingly, eclipses of the Sun are more numerous than
those of the Moon in the proportion of about 3 to 2, yet at any given place
on the Earth more lunar eclipses are visible than solar eclipses, because the
former when they occur are visible over the whole hemisphere of the Earth
which is turned towards the Moon whilst the area over which a total eclipse
of the Sun is visible is but a belt of the Earth no more than about 150 to 170
miles wide. Partial eclipses of the Sun, however, are visible over a very
much wider area on either side of the path traversed by the Moon’s shadow.

Fig. 2.—THEORY OF A TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE
SUN.

Confining our attention in the first instance to eclipses of the Sun, the
diagrams fig. 2 and fig. 3 will make clear, with very little verbal description,
the essential features of the two principal kinds of eclipses of the Sun. In
these figures S represents the Sun, M the Moon and E the Earth. They are
not, of course, even approximately drawn to scale either as to the size of the
bodies or their relative distances, but this is a matter of no moment as
regards the principles involved. M being in sunshine receives light on, as it
were, the left hand side, which faces S the Sun. The shadow of the Moon
cast into space is, in the particular case, thrown as regards its tip on to the
Earth and is intercepted by the Earth. Persons at the moment situated on the
Earth within the limits of this shadow will not see any part of the Sun at all;
they will see, in fact, nothing but the Moon as a black disc with only such
light behind and around it as may be reflected back on to the sky by the
illuminated (but to the Earth invisible) hemisphere of the Moon, or as may
proceed from the Sun’s Corona (to be described presently). The condition of

things therefore is that known as a “total” eclipse of the Sun so far as
regards the inhabitants of the narrow strip of Earth primarily affected.

Fig. 3.—THEORY OF AN ANNULAR ECLIPSE OF
THE SUN.

Fig. 3 represents nearly but not quite the same condition of things. Here
the Earth and the Moon are in those parts of their respective orbits which
put the two bodies at or near the maximum distance possible from the Sun
and from one another. The Moon casts its usual shadow, but the tip does not
actually reach any part of the Earth’s surface. Or, in other words, to an
observer on the Earth the Moon is not big enough to conceal the whole
body of the Sun. The result is this; at the instant of central coincidence the
Moon covers up only the centre of the Sun, leaving the outer edge all round
uncovered. This outer edge shows as a bright ring of light, and the eclipse is
of the sort known as an “annular” eclipse of the Sun.[3] As the greatest
breadth of the annulus can never exceed 1½ minutes of arc, an annular
eclipse may sometimes, in some part of its track, become almost or quite
total, and vice versâ.

Fig. 4.—ANNULAR ECLIPSE OF
THE SUN.

The idea will naturally suggest itself, what exactly does happen to the
inhabitants living outside (on the one side or the other) of the strip of the

Earth where the central line of shadow falls? This depends in every case on
circumstances, but it may be stated generally that the inhabitants outside the
central line but within 1000 to 2000 miles on either side, will see a larger or
smaller part of the Sun concealed by the Moon’s solid body, simultaneously
with the total concealment of the Sun to the favoured individuals who live,
or who for the moment are located, within the limits of the central zone.

Fig. 5.—PARTIAL ECLIPSE OF THE
SUN.

Now we must advance one stage in our conceptions of the movements of
the Earth and the Moon, so far as regards the bearing of those movements
on the question of eclipses. The Earth moves in a plane which is called the
“Plane of the Ecliptic,” and correspondingly, the Sun has an apparent
annual motion in the same plane. The Moon moving in a different plane,
inclined to the first mentioned one to the extent of rather more than 5°, the
Moon’s orbit will evidently intersect the ecliptic in two places. These places
of intersection are called “Nodes,” and the line which may be imagined to
join these Nodes is called the “Line of Nodes.” When the Moon is crossing
the ecliptic from the S. to the N. side thereof, the Moon is said to be passing
through its “Ascending Node” (☊); the converse of this will be the Moon
passing back again from the N. side of the ecliptic to the S. side, which is
the “Descending Node” (☋). Such changes of position, with the terms
designating them, apply not only to the Moon in its movement round the
Earth, but to all the planets and comets circulating round the Sun; and also
to satellites circulating round certain of the planets, but with these matters
we have no concern now.

Footnotes:
[1] D. Lardner, Handbook of Astronomy, 3rd ed., p. 288.
[2] But not one of them was visible at Greenwich.
[3] Latin Annulus, a ring.

CHAPTER III.
THE “SAROS” AND THE PERIODICITY OF ECLIPSES.

To bring about an eclipse of the Sun, two things must combine: (1) the
Moon must be at or near one of its Nodes; and (2), this must be at a time
when the Moon is also in “Conjunction” with the Sun. Now the Moon is in
Conjunction with the Sun (= “New Moon”) 12 or 13 times in a year, but the
Sun only passes through the Nodes of the Moon’s orbit twice a year. Hence
an eclipse of the Sun does not and cannot occur at every New Moon, but
only occasionally. An exact coincidence of Earth, Moon, and Sun, in a
straight line at a Node is not necessary to ensure an eclipse of the Sun. So
long as the Moon is within about 18½° of its Node, with a latitude of not
more than 1° 34′, an eclipse may take place. If, however, the distance is less
than 15¼° and the latitude less than 1° 23′ an eclipse must take place,
though between these limits[4] the occurrence of an eclipse is uncertain and
depends on what are called the “horizontal parallaxes” and the “apparent
semi-diameters” of the two bodies at the moment of conjunction, in other
words, on the nearness or “far-offness” of the bodies in question. Another
complication is introduced into these matters by reason of the fact that the
Nodes of the Moon’s orbit do not occupy a fixed position, but have an
annual retrograde motion of about 19¼°, in virtue of which a complete
revolution of the Nodes round the ecliptic is accomplished in 18 years 218⅞
days (= 18.5997 years).
The backward movement of the Moon’s Nodes combined with the
apparent motion of the Sun in the ecliptic causes the Moon in its monthly
course round the Earth to complete a revolution with respect to its Nodes in
a less time (27.2 days) than it takes to get back to Conjunction with the Sun
(29.5 days); and a curious consequence, as we shall see directly, flows from
these facts and from one other fact. The other fact is to the Sun starting

coincident with one of the Moon’s Nodes, returns on the Ecliptic to the
same Node in 346.6 days. The first named period of 27.2 days is called the
“Nodical Revolution of the Moon” or “Draconic Month,” the other period
of 29.5 days is called the “Synodical Revolution of the Moon.” Now the
curious consequence of these figures being what they are is that 242
Draconic Months, 223 Lunations, and 19 Returns of the Sun to one and the
same Node of the Moon’s orbit, are all accomplished in the same time
within 11 hours. Thus (ignoring refinements of decimals):—
Days Days. Years. Days. Hours.
242 times 27.2 = 6585.36 = 18 10 8½
223 times 29.5 = 6585.32 = 18 10 7¾
19 times 346.6 = 6585.78 = 18 10 18¾

The interpretation to be put upon these coincidences is this: that
supposing Sun and Moon to start together from a Node they would, after
the lapse of 6585 days and a fraction, be found again together very near the
same Node. During the interval there would have been 223 New and Full
Moons. The exact time required for 223 Lunations is such that in the case
supposed the 223rd conjunction of the two bodies would happen a little
before they reached the Node; their distance therefrom would be 28′ of arc.
And the final fact is that eclipses recur in almost, though not quite, the same
regular order every 6585⅓ days, or more exactly, 18 years, 10 days, 7
hours, 42 minutes.[5] This is the celebrated Chaldean “Saros,” and was used
by the ancients (and can still be used by the moderns in the way of a
pastime) for the prediction of eclipses alike of the Sun and of the Moon.

At the end of a Saros period, starting from any date that may have been
chosen, the Moon will be in the same position with respect to the Sun,
nearly in the same part of the heavens, nearly in the same part of its orbit,
and very nearly indeed at the same distance from its Node as at the date
chosen for the terminus a quo of the Saros. But there are trifling
discrepancies in the case (the difference of about 11 hours between 223
lunations and 19 returns of the Sun to the Moon’s Node is one) and these
have an appreciable effect in disturbing not so much the sequence of the
eclipses in the next following Saros as their magnitude and visibility at
given places on the Earth’s surface. Hence, a more accurate succession will

be obtained by combining 3 Saros periods, making 54 years, 31 days; while,
best of all, to secure an almost perfect repetition of a series of eclipses will
be a combination of 48 Saroses, making 865 years for the Moon; and of
about 70 Saroses, or more than 1200 years for the Sun.
These considerations are leading us rather too far afield. Let us return to
a more simple condition of things. The practical use of the Saros in its most
elementary conception is somewhat on this wise. Given 18 or 19 old
Almanacs ranging, say, from 1880 to 1898, how can we turn to account the
information they afford us in order to obtain from them information
respecting the eclipses which will happen between 1899 and 1917? Nothing
easier. Add 18y 10d 7h 42m to the middle time of every eclipse which took
place between 1880 and 1898 beginning, say, with the last of 1879 or the
first of 1880, and we shall find what eclipses will happen in 1898 and 17
following years, as witness by way of example the following table:—
Error of Saros by
Exact
d. h. m. Calculation.
Moon. 1879 Dec. 28 4 26
p.m.
(Mag. 0.17) 18 10 7 42

(Mag. 0.16) 1898 Jan. 8 12 8 a.m. (civil time) +3 m.

d. h. m.
Sun. 1880 Jan. 11 10 48
p.m.
(Total) 18 10 7 42

(Total) 1898 Jan. 22 6 30 (civil time) -1 h.
a.m. 7 m.

d. h. m.
Moon. 1880 June 22 1 50
p.m.
(Mag. Total) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. 0.93) 1898 July 3 9 32 +35 m.
p.m.

d. h. m.
Sun. 1880 July 7 1 35
p.m.
(Mag. Annular) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. Annular) 1898 July 18 9 17 +1 h. 10 m.
p.m.

d. h. m.
Sun. 1880 Dec. 2 3 11 (civil time).
a.m.
(Mag. 0.04) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. 0.02) 1898 Dec. 13 10 53 -1 h. 5 m.
a.m.

d. h. m.
Moon. 1880 Dec. 16 3 39
p.m.
(Mag. Total) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. Total) 1898 Dec. 27 11 21 -13 m.
p.m.

d. h. m.
Sun. 1880 Dec. 31 1 45
p.m.
(Mag. 0.71) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. 0.72) 1899 Jan. 11 9 27 -1 h. 11 m.
p.m.

There having been 5 recurrences of Feb. 29 between Dec. 1879 and Jan.
1899, 5 leap years having intervened, we have to add an extra day to the
Saros period in the later part of the above Table.[6]
Let us make another start and see what we can learn from the eclipses,
say, of 1883.
Error of Saros by
Exact
d. h. m. Calculation.
Moon 1883 April 22 11 39
a.m.
(Mag. 0.8) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. Penumbral) 1901 May 3 7 21 +51 m.
p.m.

d. h. m.
Sun 1883 May 6 9 45 Visible,
p.m. Philippines.
(Mag. Total) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. Total) 1901 May 18 5 27 (civil time). -2 m.
a.m.

d. h. m.
Moon 1883 Oct. 16 6 54 Visible,
a.m. California.
(Mag. 0.28) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. 0.23) 1901 Oct. 27 2 36 -39 m.
p.m.

d. h. m.
Sun 1883 Oct. 30 11 37 Visible, N. Japan.
p.m.
(Mag. Annular) 18 11 7 42

(Mag. Annular) 1901 Nov. 11 7 19 (civil time) +1 m.
a.m.
The foregoing does not by any means exhaust all that can be said
respecting the Saros even on the popular side.
If the Saros comprised an exact number of days, each eclipse of a second
Saros series would be visible in the same regions of the Earth as the
corresponding eclipse in the previous series. But since there is a surplus
fraction of nearly one-third of a day, each subsequent eclipse will be visible
in another region of the Earth, which will be roughly a third of the Earth’s
circumference in longitude backwards (i.e. about 120° to the W.), because
the Earth itself will be turned on its axis one-third forwards.
After what has been said as to the Saros and its use it might be supposed
that a correct list of eclipses for 18.03 years would suffice for all ordinary
purposes of eclipse prediction, and that the sequence of eclipses at any
future time might be ascertained by adding to some one eclipse which had
already happened so many Saros periods as might embrace the years future
whose eclipses it was desired to study. This would be true in a sense, but
would not be literally and effectively true, because corresponding eclipses
do not recur exactly under the same conditions, for there are small residual
discrepancies in the times and circumstances affecting the real movements
of the Earth and Moon and the apparent movement of the Sun which, in the
lapse of years and centuries, accumulate sufficiently to dislocate what
otherwise would be exact coincidences. Thus an eclipse of the Moon which
in A.D. 565 was of 6 digits[7] was in 583 of 7 digits, and in 601 nearly 8. In
908 the eclipse became total, and remained so for about twelve periods, or
until 1088. This eclipse continued to diminish until the beginning of the
15th century, when it disappeared in 1413. Let us take now the life of an
eclipse of the Sun. One appeared at the North Pole in June A.D. 1295, and
showed itself more and more towards the S. at each subsequent period. On
August 27, 1367, it made its first appearance in the North of Europe; in
1439 it was visible all over Europe; in 1601, being its 19th appearance, it
was central and annular in England; on May 5, 1818, it was visible in
London, and again on May 15, 1836. Its three next appearances were on
May 26, 1854, June 6, 1872, and June 17, 1890. At its 39th appearance, on
August 10, 1980, the Moon’s shadow will have passed the equator, and as

the eclipse will take place nearly at midnight (Greenwich M.T.), the
phenomenon will be invisible in Europe, Africa, and Asia. At every
succeeding period the central line of the eclipse will lie more and more to
the S., until finally, on September 30, 2665, which will be its 78th
appearance, it will vanish at the South Pole.[8]
The operation of the Saros effects which have been specified above, may
be noticed in some of the groups of eclipses which have been much in
evidence (as will appear from a subsequent chapter), during the second half
of the 19th century. The following are two noteworthy Saros groups of
Solar eclipses:—
1842 July 8. 1850 Aug. 7.
1860 " 18. 1868 " 17.
1878 " 29. 1886 " 29.
1896 Aug. 9. 1904 Sept. 9.
If the curious reader will trace, by means of the Nautical Almanac (or
some other Almanac which deals with eclipses in adequate detail), the
geographical distribution of the foregoing eclipses on the Earth’s surface, he
will see that they fulfil the statement made on p. 24 (ante), that a Saros
eclipse when it reappears, does so in regions of the Earth averaging 120° of
longitude to the W. of those in which it had, on the last preceding occasion,
been seen; and also that it gradually works northwards or southwards.
But a given Saros eclipse in its successive reappearances undergoes other
transformations besides that of Terrestrial longitude. These are well set forth
by Professor Newcomb[9]:—
“Since every successive recurrence of such an eclipse throws the
conjunction 28′ further toward the W. of the node, the conjunction must, in
process of time, take place so far back from the node that no eclipse will
occur, and the series will end. For the same reason there must be a
commencement to the series, the first eclipse being E. of the node. A new
eclipse thus entering will at first be a very small one, but will be larger at
every recurrence in each Saros. If it is an eclipse of the Moon, it will be
total from its 13th until its 36th recurrence. There will be then about 13
partial eclipses, each of which will be smaller than the last, when they will

fail entirely, the conjunction taking place so far from the node that the
Moon does not touch the Earth’s shadow. The whole interval of time over
which a series of lunar eclipses thus extend will be about 48 periods, or 865
years. When a series of solar eclipses begins, the penumbra of the first will
just graze the earth not far from one of the poles. There will then be, on the
average, 11 or 12 partial eclipses of the Sun, each larger than the preceding
one, occurring at regular intervals of one Saros. Then the central line,
whether it be that of a total or annular eclipse, will begin to touch the Earth,
and we shall have a series of 40 or 50 central eclipses. The central line will
strike near one pole in the first part of the series; in the equatorial regions
about the middle of the series, and will leave the Earth by the other pole at
the end. Ten or twelve partial eclipses will follow, and this particular series
will cease.”
These facts deserve to be expanded a little.
We have seen that all eclipses may be grouped in a series, and that 18
years or thereabouts is the duration of each series, or Saros cycle. But these
cycles are themselves subject to cycles, so that the Saros itself passes
through a cycle of about 64 Saroses before the conditions under which any
given start was made, come quite round again. Sixty-four times 18 make
1152, so that the duration of a Solar eclipse Great Cycle may be taken at
about 1150 years. The progression of such a series across the face of the
Earth is thus described by Mrs. Todd, who gives a very clear account of the
matter:—
“The advent of a slight partial eclipse near either pole of the Earth will
herald the beginning of the new series. At each succeeding return
conformably to the Saros, the partial eclipse will move a little further
towards the opposite pole, its magnitude gradually increasing for about 200
years, but during all this time only the lunar penumbra will impinge upon
the Earth. But when the true shadow begins to touch, the obscuration will
have become annular or total near the pole where it first appeared. The
eclipse has now acquired a track, which will cross the Earth slightly farther
from that pole every time it returns, for about 750 years. At the conclusion
of this interval, the shadow path will have reached the opposite pole; the
eclipse will then become partial again, and continue to grow smaller and
smaller for about 200 years additional. The series then ceases to exist, its

entire duration having been about 1150 years. The series of “great eclipses”
of which two occurred in 1865 and 1883, while others will happen in 1901,
1919, 1937, 1955, and 1973, affords an excellent instance of the northward
progression of eclipse tracks; and another series, with totality nearly as
great (1850, 1868, 1886, 1904, and 1922), is progressing slowly
southwards.”
The word “Digit,” formerly used in connection with eclipses, requires
some explanation. The origin of the word is obvious enough, coming as it
does from the Latin word Digitus, a finger. But as human beings have only
eight fingers and two thumbs it is by no means clear how the word came to
be used for twelfths of the disc of the Sun or Moon instead of tenths.
However, such was the case; and when a 16th-century astronomer spoke of
an eclipse of six digits, he meant that one-half of the luminary in question,
be it Sun or Moon, was covered. The earliest use of the word “Digit” in this
connection was to refer to the twelfth part of the visible surface of the Sun
or Moon; but before the word went out of use, it came to be applied to
twelfths of the visible diameter of the disc of the Sun or Moon, which was
much more convenient. However, the word is now almost obsolete in both
senses, and partial eclipses, alike of the Sun and of the Moon, are defined in
decimal parts of the diameter of the luminary—tenths or hundredths
according to the amount of precision which is aimed at. Where an eclipse of
the Moon is described as being of more than 12 Digits or more than 1.0 (= 1
diameter) it is to be understood that the eclipse will be (or was) not only
total, but that the Moon will be (or was) immersed in the Earth’s shadow
with a more or less considerable extent of shadow encompassing it.
There are some further matters which require to be mentioned connected
with the periodicity of eclipses. To use a phrase which is often employed,
there is such a thing as an “Eclipse Season,” and what this is can only be
adequately comprehended by looking through a catalogue of eclipses for a
number of years arranged in a tabular form, and by collating the months or
groups of months in which batches of eclipses occur. This is not an obvious
matter to the casual purchaser of an almanac, who, feeling just a slight
interest in the eclipses of a coming new year, dips into his new purchase to
see what those eclipses will be. A haphazard glance at the almanacs of even
two or three successive years will probably fail to bring home to him the
idea that each year has its own eclipse season in which eclipses may occur,

and that eclipses are not to be looked for save at two special epochs, which
last about a month each, and which are separated from one another and
from the eclipse seasons of the previous and of the following years by
intervals of about six months, within a few days more or less. Such,
however, is the case. A little thought will soon make it clear why such
should be the case. We have already seen that the Moon’s orbit, like that of
every other planetary member of the Solar System, has two crossing places
with respect to the ecliptic which are called “Nodes.” We know also that the
apparent motion of the Sun causes that body to traverse the whole of the
ecliptic in the course of the year. The conjoint result of all this is that the
Moon passes through a Node twice in every lunar month of 27 days, and the
Sun passes (apparently) through a Node twice in every year. The first
ultimate result of these facts is that eclipses can only take place at or near
the nodal passages of the Moon and the Sun, and that as the Sun’s nodal
passages are separated by six months in every case the average interval
between each set of eclipses, if there is more than one, must in all cases be
six months, more or less by a few days, dependent upon the latitude and
longitude of the Moon at or about the time of its Conjunction or Opposition
under the circumstances already detailed. If the logic of this commends
itself to the reader’s mind, he will see at once why eclipses or groups of
eclipses must be separated by intervals of about half an ordinary year.
Hence it comes about that, taking one year with another, it may be said that
we shall always have a couple of principal eclipses with an interval of half a
year (say 183 days) between each; and that on either side of these dominant
eclipses there will, or may be, a fortnight before or a fortnight after, two
other pairs of eclipses with, in occasional years, one extra thrown in. It is in
this way that we obtain what it has already been said dogmatically that we
do obtain; namely, always in one year two eclipses, which must be both of
the Sun, or any number of eclipses up to seven, which number will be
unequally allotted to the Sun or to the Moon according to circumstances.
Though it is roughly correct to say that the two eclipse seasons of every
year run to about a month each, in length, yet it may be desirable to be a
little more precise, and to say that the limits of time for solar eclipses cover
36 days (namely 18 days before and 18 days after the Sun’s nodal
passages); whilst in the case of the Moon, the limits are the lesser interval
of 23 days, being 11½ on either side of the Moon’s nodal passages.

We have already seen[10] that the Moon’s nodes are perpetually
undergoing a change of place. Were it not so, eclipses of the Sun and Moon
would always happen year after year in the same pair of months for us on
the Earth. But the operative effect of the shifting of the nodes is to displace
backwards the eclipse seasons by about 20 days. For instance in 1899 the
eclipse seasons fall in June and December. The middle of the eclipse
seasons for the next succeeding 20 or 30 years will be found by taking the
dates of June 8 and December 2, 1899, and working the months backwards
by the amount of 19⅔ days for each succeeding year. Thus the eclipse
seasons in 1900 will fall in the months of May and November; accordingly
amongst the eclipses of that year we shall find eclipses on May 28, June 13,
and November 22.
Perhaps it would tend to the more complete elucidation of the facts stated
in the last half dozen pages, if I were to set out in a tabular form all the
eclipses of a succession, say of half a Saros or 9 years, and thus exhibit by
an appeal to the eye directly the grouping of eclipse seasons the principles
of which I have been endeavouring to define and explain in words.

1894. March 21. ☾
April 6. ☉ } March 29. *
Sept. 15. ☾
Sept. 29. ☉ } Sept. 22. **
1895. March 11. ☾
March 26. ☉ } March 18. *
Aug. 20. ☉
Sept. 4. ☾ } Sept. 4. **
Sept. 18. ☉
1896. Feb. 13. ☉
Feb. 28. ☾ } Feb. 20. *
Aug. 9. ☉
Aug. 23. ☾ } Aug. 16. **
1897. Feb. 1. ☉ Feb. 1. *
July 29. ☉ July 29. **

1898. Jan. 7. ☾
Jan. 22. ☉ } Jan. 14. *
July 3. ☾
July 18. ☉ } July 10. **
Dec. 13. ☉
Dec. 27. ☾ } Dec. 27. *
1899. Jan. 11. ☉
June 8. ☉
June 23. ☾ } June 15. **
Dec. 2. ☉
Dec. 16. ☾ } Dec. 9. *
1900. May 28. ☉
June 13. ☾ } June 5. **
Nov. 22. ☉ Nov. 22. *
1901. May 3. ☾
May 18. ☉ } May 10. **
Oct. 27. ☾
Nov. 11. ☉ } Nov. 3. *
1902. April 8. ☉
April 22. ☾ } April 22. **
May 7. ☉
Oct. 17. ☾
Oct. 31. ☉ } Oct. 24. *

The Epochs in the last column which are marked with stars (*) or (**) as
the case may be, represent corresponding nodes so that from any one single-
star date to the next nearest single-star date means an interval of one year
less (on an average) the 19⅔ days spoken of on p. 32 (ante). A glance at
each successive pair of dates will quickly disclose the periodical
retrogradation of the eclipse epochs.

Footnotes:
[4] These limits are slightly different in the case of eclipses of the Moon. (See p.
190, post.)
[5] This assumes that 5 of these years are leap years.
[6] If there are 5 leap years in the 18, the odd days will be 10; if 4 they will be
11; if only 3 leap years (as from 1797 to 1815 and 1897 to 1915), the odd days to
be added will be 12.
[7] See p. 28 (post) for an explanation of this word.
[8] In Mrs. D. P. Todd’s interesting little book, Total Eclipses of the Sun (Boston,
U.S., 1894), which will be several times referred to in this work, two maps will
be found, which will help to illustrate the successive northerly or southerly
progress of a series of Solar eclipses, during centuries.
[9] In his and Professor Holden’s Astronomy for Schools and Colleges, p. 184.
[10] See p. 19 (ante).

CHAPTER IV.
MISCELLANEOUS THEORETICAL MATTERS CONNECTED WITH
ECLIPSES OF THE SUN (CHIEFLY).

One or two miscellaneous matters respecting eclipses of the Sun (chiefly)
will be dealt with in this chapter. It is not easy to explain or define in words
the circumstances which control the duration of a Solar eclipse, whereas in
the case of a lunar eclipse the obscuration is the same in degree at all parts
of the Earth where the Moon is visible. In the case of a Solar eclipse it may
be total, perhaps, in Africa, may be of six digits only in Spain, and of two
only in England. Under the most favourable circumstances the breadth of
the track of totality across the Earth cannot be more than 170 miles, and it
may be anything less than that down to zero where the eclipse will cease to
be total at all, and will become annular. The question whether a given
eclipse shall exhibit itself on its central line as a total or an annular one
depends, as has been already explained, on the varying distances of the
Earth and the Moon from the Sun in different parts of their respective
orbits. Hence it follows that not only may an eclipse show itself for several
Saros appearances as total and afterwards become annular, and vice versâ,
but on rare occasions one and the same eclipse may be annular in one part
of its track across the Earth and total in another part, a short time earlier or
later. This last-named condition might arise because the Moon’s distance
from the Earth or the Sun had varied sufficiently during the progress of the
eclipse to bring about such a result; or because the shadow just reaching the
Earth and no more the eclipse would be total only for the moment when a
view perpendicular upwards could be had of it, and would be annular for
the minutes preceding and the minutes following the perpendicular glimpse
obtained by observers actually on the central line. The eclipse of December
12, 1890, was an instance of this.

If the paths of several central eclipses of the Sun are compared by placing
side by side a series of charts, such as those given in the Nautical Almanac
or in Oppolzer’s Canon, it will be noticed that the direction of the central
line varies with the season of the year. In the month of March the line runs
from S.W. to N.E., and in September from N.W. to S.E. In June the line is a
curve, going first to the N.E. and then to the S.E. In December the state of
things is reversed, the curve going first to the S.E. and then to the N.E. At
all places within about 2000 miles of the central line the eclipse will be
visible, and the nearer a place is to the central line, so much the larger will
be the portion of the Sun’s disc concealed from observers there by the
Moon. If the central line runs but a little to the N. of the Equator in Winter
or of 25° of N. latitude in Summer, the eclipse will be visible all over the
Northern Hemisphere, and the converse will apply to the Southern
Hemisphere. It is something like a general rule in the case of total and
annular eclipses, though subject to many modifications, that places within
200-250 miles of the central line will have partial eclipse of 11 digits; from
thence to 500 miles of 10 digits, and so on, diminishing something like 1
digit for every 250 miles, so that at 2000 miles, or rather more, the Sun will
be only to a very slight extent eclipsed, or will escape eclipse altogether.
The diameter of the Sun being 866,000 miles and the Moon being only
2160 miles or 1⁄400th how comes it to be possible that such a tiny object
should be capable of concealing a globe 400 times bigger than itself? The
answer is—Distance. The increased distance does it. The Moon at its
normal distance from the Earth of 237,000 miles could only conceal by
eclipse a body of its own size or smaller, but the Sun being 93,000,000
miles away, or 392 times the distance of the Moon, the fraction 1⁄392
representing the main distance of the Moon, more than wipes out the
fraction 1⁄400 which represents our satellite’s smaller size.
During a total eclipse of the Sun, the Moon’s shadow travels across the
Earth at a prodigious pace—1830 miles an hour; 30½ miles a minute; or
rather more than a ½ mile a second. This great velocity is at once a clue to
the fact that the total phase during an eclipse of the Sun lasts for so brief a
time as a few minutes; and also to the fact that the shadow comes and goes
almost without being seen unless a very sharp watch is kept for it. Indeed, it
is only observers posted on high ground with some miles of open low

ground spread out under their eyes who have much chance of detecting the
shadow come up, go over them, and pass forwards.
Places at or near the Earth’s equator enjoy the best opportunities for
seeing total eclipses of the Sun, because whilst the Moon’s shadow travels
eastwards along the Earth’s surface at something like 2000 miles an hour,
an observer at the equator is carried in the same direction by virtue of the
Earth’s axial rotation at the rate of 1040 miles an hour. But the speed
imparted to an observer as the result of the Earth’s axial rotation diminishes
from the equator towards the poles where it is nil, so that the nearer he is to
a pole the slower he goes, and therefore the sooner will the Moon’s shadow
overtake and pass him, and the less the time at his disposal for seeing the
Sun hidden by the Moon.
It was calculated by Du Sèjour that the greatest possible duration of the
total phase of a Solar eclipse at the equator would be 7m 58s, and for the
latitude of Paris 6m 10s. In the case of an annular eclipse the figures would
be 12m 24s for the equator, and 9m 56s for the latitude of Paris. These
figures contemplate a combination of all the most favourable circumstances
possible; as a matter of fact, I believe that the greatest length of total phase
which has been actually known was 6½m and that was in the case of the
eclipse of August 29, 1886. It was in the open Atlantic that this duration
occurred, but it was not observed. The maximum observed obscuration
during this eclipse was no more than 4m.
Though total eclipses of the Sun happen with tolerable frequency so far
as regards the Earth as a whole, yet they are exceedingly rare at any given
place. Take London, for instance. From the calculations of Hind, confirmed
by Maguire,[11] it may be considered as an established fact that there was no
total eclipse visible at London between A.D. 878 and 1715, an interval of
837 years. The next one visible at London, though uncertain, is also a very
long way off. There will be a total eclipse on August 11, 1999, which will
come as near to London as the Isle of Wight, but Hind, writing in 1871, said
that he doubted whether there would be any other total eclipse “visible in
England for 250 years[12] from the present time.” Maguire states that the
Sun has been eclipsed, besides twice at London, also twice at Dublin, and
no fewer than five times at Edinburgh during the 846 years examined by
him. In fact that every part of the British Isles has seen a total eclipse at

some time or other between A.D. 878 and 1724 except a small tract of
country at Dingle, on the West coast of Ireland. The longest totality was on
June 15, 885, namely, 4m 55s, and the shortest in July 16, 1330, namely, 0m
56s.
Contrast with this the obscure island of Blanquilla, off the northern coast
of Venezuela. The inhabitants of that island not long ago had the choice of
two total eclipses within three and a half years, namely, August 29, 1886,
and December 22, 1889; whilst Yellowstone, U.S., had two in twelve years
(July 29, 1878, and January 1, 1889).
Counting from first to last, Du Sèjour found that at the equator an eclipse
of the Sun might last 4h 29m, and at the latitude of Paris 3h 26m. These
intervals, of course, cover all the subordinate phases. The total phase which
alone (with perhaps a couple of minutes added) is productive of spectacular
effects, and interesting scientific results is a mere matter of minutes which
may be as few as one (or less), or only as many as 6 or 8.
As a rule, a summer eclipse will last longer than a winter one, because in
summer the Earth (and the Moon with it), being at its maximum distance
from the Sun, the Sun will be at its minimum apparent size, and therefore
the Moon will be able to conceal it the longer.

Footnotes:
[11] Month. Not., R.A.S., vol. xlv., p. 400. June 1885.
[12] Johnson makes the eclipse of June 14, 2151, to be “nearly, if not quite, total
at London.” Possibly it was this eclipse which Hind had in his thoughts when he
wrote in the Times (July 28, 1871) the passage quoted above.

CHAPTER V.
WHAT IS OBSERVED DURING THE EARLIER STAGES OF AN
ECLIPSE OF THE SUN.

The information to be given in this and the next following chapters will
almost exclusively concern total and annular eclipses of the Sun, for, in real
truth, there is practically only one thing to think about during a partial
eclipse of the Sun. This is, to watch when the Moon’s black body comes on
to the Sun and goes off again, for there are no subsidiary phenomena, either
interesting or uninteresting, unless, indeed, the eclipse should be nearly
total. The progress of astronomical science in regard to eclipses has been so
extensive and remarkable of late years that, unless the various points for
consideration are kept together under well-defined heads, it will be almost
impossible either for a writer or a reader to do full justice to the subject.
Having regard to the fact that the original conception of this volume was
that it should serve as a forerunner to the total solar eclipse of May 28, 1900
(and through that to other total eclipses), from a popular rather than from a
technical standpoint, I think it will be best to mention one by one the
principal features which spectators should look out for, and to do so as
nearly as may be in the order which Nature itself will observe when the
time comes.
Of course the commencement of an eclipse, which is virtually the
moment when the encroachment on the circular outline of the Sun by the
Moon begins, or can be seen, though interesting as a proof that the
astronomer’s prophecy is about to be fulfilled, is not a matter of any special
importance, even in a popular sense, much less in a scientific sense. As a
rule, the total phase does not become imminent, so to speak, until a whole
hour and more has elapsed since the first contact; and that hour will be
employed by the scientific observer, less in looking at the Sun than in

looking at his instruments and apparatus. He will do this for the purpose of
making quite sure that everything will be ready for the full utilisation to the
utmost extent of the precious seconds of time into which all his delicate
observations have to be squeezed during the total phase.
With these preliminary observations I shall proceed now to break up the
remainder of what I have to say respecting total eclipses into what suggest
themselves as convenient sectional heads.

THE MOON’S SHADOW AND THE DARKNESS IT CAUSES.

In awaiting the darkness which is expected to manifest itself an
unthinking and inexperienced observer is apt to look out for the coming
obscurity, as he looks out for night-fall half an hour or more after sunset and
during the evening twilight. The darkness of an eclipse is all this and
something more. It is something more in two senses; for the interval of time
between the commencement of an eclipse and totality is different in
duration and different in quality, so to speak, from the diminution of
daylight on the Earth which ensues as the twilight of evening runs its
course. Speaking roughly, sunset may be described as an almost
instantaneous loss of full sunlight; and the gradual loss of daylight is
noticeable even at such short intervals as from one five minutes to another.
This is by no means the case previous to a total eclipse of the Sun. When
that is about to occur, the reduction of the effective sunlight is far more
gradual. For instance, half an hour after an eclipse has commenced more
than half the Sun’s disc will still be imparting light to the Earth: but half an
hour after sunset the deficiency of daylight will be very much more marked
and, if no artificial light is at hand, very much more inconvenient.
If there should be within easy reach of the observer’s post a bushy tree,
such for instance as an elm, 30 ft. or 40 ft. high, and spreading out
sufficiently for him to place himself under it in a straight line with the Sun,
and with a nice smooth surface of ground for the sun’s rays to fall on, he
will see a multitude of images of the Sun thrown upon the ground.
Until the eclipse has commenced these images will be tiny circles
overlapping one another, and of course each of these circles means so many
images of the Sun. These images indeed can be seen on any fine day, and

the circles increase in size in proportion to the height of the foliage above
the ground, being something like 1 inch for every 10 feet. It may be
remarked, by the way, that the images are circles, because the Sun is a
source of light having a circular outline, and is not a point of light like a
star. If it were, the outline of the foliage would be reproduced on the ground
leaf for leaf. It follows naturally from all this that when in consequence of
there being an eclipse in progress the shape of the Sun’s contour gradually
changes, so will the shape of the Solar images on the ground change,
becoming eventually so many crescents. Moreover, the horns of the
crescent-shaped images will be in the reverse direction to the horns of the
actual crescent of the Sun at the moment, the rays of the Sun crossing as
they pass through the foliage, just as if each interstice were a lens.
Supposing there are some spots on the Sun at a time when an eclipse is in
progress the Moon’s passage over these spots may as well be noticed. In
bygone years some amount of attention was devoted to this matter with the
view of ascertaining whether any alteration took place in the appearance of
the spots; distortion, for instance, such as might be produced by the
intervention of a lunar atmosphere. No such distortion was ever noticed,
and observations with this idea in view may be said to possess now only an
academic interest, for it may be regarded as a well-established fact that the
Moon has no atmosphere.
During the passage of the Moon over Sun-spots an opportunity is
afforded of comparing the blackness, or perhaps we should rather say, the
intensity of the shade of a Sun-spot with the blackness of the Moon’s disc.
Testimony herein is unanimous that the blackness of the Moon during the
stages of partial eclipse is intense compared with the darkest parts of a Sun-
spot; and this, be it remembered, in spite of the fact that during the partial
phase the atmosphere between the observer and the Sun is brilliantly
illuminated, whilst the Moon itself, being exposed to Earth-shine, is by no
means absolutely devoid of all illumination.
When the Moon is passing across the Sun there have often been noticed
along the limb of the Moon fringes of colour, and dark and bright bands.
This might not necessarily be a real appearance for it is conceivable that
such traces of colour might be due to the telescopes employed not having
been truly achromatic, that is, not sufficiently corrected for colour; but

making every allowance for this possible source of mistake there yet
remains proof that the colour which has often been seen has been real.
As to whether the Moon’s limb can be seen during a partial eclipse, or
during the partial phase of what is to be a total eclipse, the evidence is
somewhat conflicting. There is no doubt that when the totality is close at
hand the Moon’s limb can be seen projected on the Corona (presently to be
described); but the question is, whether the far-off limb of the Moon can be
detected in the open sky whilst something like full daylight still prevails on
the Earth. Undoubtedly the preponderance of evidence is against the
visibility of the Moon as a whole, under such circumstances; but there is
nevertheless some testimony to the contrary. A French observer, E. Liais,
said that three photographic plates of the eclipse of 1858 seen in S. America
all showed the outer limb of the Moon with more or less distinctness. This
testimony, be it noted, is photographic and not visual; and on the whole it
seems safest to say that there is very small probability of the Moon as a
whole ever being seen under the circumstances in question.
What has just been said concerns the visibility of the Moon during quite
the early, or on the other hand during quite the late, stages of a total eclipse.
Immediately before or after totality the visibility of the whole contour of the
Moon is a certain fact; and the only point upon which there is a difference
of opinion is as to what are the time-limits beyond which the Moon must
not be expected to be seen. The various records are exceedingly
contradictory: perhaps the utmost that can be said is that the whole Moon
must not be expected to be visible till about 20 minutes before totality, or
for more than 5 minutes after totality—but it must be admitted that these
figures are very uncertain in regard to any particular eclipse.
It has been sometimes noticed when the crescent of the Sun had become
comparatively small, say that the Sun was about ⅞ths covered, that the
uncovered portion exhibited evident colour which has been variously
described as “violet,” “brick-red,” “reddish,” “pink,” “orange,” “yellowish.”
The observations on this point are not very numerous and, as will appear
from the statement just made, are not very consistent; still it seems safe to
assume that a hue, more or less reddish, does often pervade the uncovered
portion of a partially-eclipsed Sun.

The remark just made as regards the Sun seems to have some application
to the Moon. There are a certain number of instances on record that what is
commonly spoken of as the black body of the Moon does, under certain
circumstances, display traces of red which has been variously spoken of as
“crimson,” “dull coppery,” “reddish-brownish” and “dull glowing coal.”

SHADOW BANDS.

Let us suppose that we have a chance of observing a total eclipse of the
Sun; have completed all our preliminary preparations; have taken note of
everything which needs to be noted or suggests itself for that purpose up till
nearly the grand climax; and that the clock tells us that we are within, say,
five minutes of totality. Somewhere about this time perhaps we shall be able
to detect, dancing across the landscape, singular wavy lines of light and
shade. These are the “Shadow Bands,” as they are called. The phrase is
curiously inexplicit, but seemingly cannot be improved upon at present
because the philosophy of these appearances—their origin and the laws
which regulate their visibility—are unknown, perhaps because amid the
multitude of other things to think about sufficient attention has hitherto not
been paid to the study of them. These shadow bands are most striking if a
high plastered wall, such as the front of a stone or stuccoed house, is in their
track as a screen to receive them. The shadow bands seem to vary both in
breadth and distance apart at different eclipses, and also in the speed with
which they pass along. Though, as already stated, little is known of their
origin yet they may be conceived to be due to irregularities in the
atmospheric refraction of the slender beam of light coming from the waning
or the waxing crescent of the Sun, for be it understood they may be visible
after totality as well as before it. It is to be remarked that they have never
been photographed.

Fig. 6.—SHADOW BANDS.

In addition to the shadow bands there are instances on record of the limbs
of the Sun’s crescent appearing to undulate violently on the approach of
totality. These undulations were noticed by Airy in 1842 about 6 minutes
before totality. Blake, in America in 1869, observed the same phenomenon
8 minutes before totality. In other cases the interval would seem to have
been very much shorter—a mere matter of seconds. A very singular
observation was made in 1858 by Mr. J. D. Smith at Laycock Abbey,
Wiltshire, on the occasion of the annular eclipse of that year. He says[13]:
—“Both my brother and myself were distinctly impressed with the
conviction that the withdrawal of light was not continuous, but by
pulsations, or, as it were, waves of obscuration, the darkness increasing by
strokes which sensibly smote the eye, and were repeated distinctly some
five or seven times after we had remarked the phenomenon and before the
time of greatest obscuration. This did not occur on the return of light, which
came back continuously and without shock or break.” Rümker mentions
that though this phenomenon was very apparent to the naked eye it was not
visible in the telescope.
Faint rays or brushes of light sometimes seem to spring from the
diminishing crescent of the Sun. These rays generally are very transient and
not very conspicuous, and perhaps must be distinguished as regards both
their appearance and their origin from the more striking rays which are

usually seen a few minutes before or after totality, and which are generally
associated with, or even deemed to belong to, the Corona. Fig. 7 represents
these rays as seen in Spain on July 18, 1860, some minutes after totality.
They are described as having been well defined, but at some moments more
marked than at others, and though well-defined yet constantly varying.
Radiations of light more or less of the character just described may
probably be regarded as a standing feature of every total eclipse.

Fig. 7.—RAYS OF LIGHT
SEEN NEAR THE TIME OF
TOTALITY.

THE APPROACH OF TOTALITY.

The next thing to think about and to look out for is the approach of the
Moon’s shadow. I have mentioned this already,[14] and also the appalling
velocity with which it seems to approach. By this time the coming darkness,
which characterises every total phase, will have reached an advanced stage
of development. The darkness begins to be felt. The events which manifest
themselves at this juncture on the Earth (rather than in the sky around the
Sun) are so graphically described by the American writer whom I have
already quoted, and who writes, moreover, from personal experience, that I

cannot do better than transfer her striking account to my pages.[15] “Then,
with frightful velocity, the actual shadow of the Moon is often seen
approaching, a tangible darkness advancing almost like a wall, swift as
imagination, silent as doom. The immensity of nature never comes quite so
near as then, and strong must be the nerves not to quiver as this blue-black
shadow rushes upon the spectator with incredible speed. A vast, palpable
presence seems overwhelming the world. The blue sky changes to gray or
dull purple, speedily becoming more dusky, and a death-like trance seizes
upon everything earthly. Birds, with terrified cries, fly bewildered for a
moment, and then silently seek their night-quarters. Bats emerge stealthily.
Sensitive flowers, the scarlet pimpernel, the African mimosa, close their
delicate petals, and a sense of hushed expectancy deepens with the
darkness. An assembled crowd is awed into absolute silence almost
invariably. Trivial chatter and senseless joking cease. Sometimes the
shadow engulfs the observer smoothly, sometimes apparently with jerks;
but all the world might well be dead and cold and turned to ashes. Often the
very air seems to hold its breath for sympathy; at other times a lull suddenly
awakens into a strange wind, blowing with unnatural effect. Then out upon
the darkness, gruesome but sublime, flashes the glory of the incomparable
corona, a silvery, soft, unearthly light, with radiant streamers, stretching at
times millions of uncomprehended miles into space, while the rosy, flaming
protuberances skirt the black rim of the Moon in ethereal splendour. It
becomes curiously cold, dew frequently forms, and the chill is perhaps
mental as well as physical. Suddenly, instantaneous as a lightning flash, an
arrow of actual sunlight strikes the landscape, and Earth comes to life again,
while corona and protuberances melt into the returning brilliance, and
occasionally the receding lunar shadow is glimpsed as it flies away with the
tremendous speed of its approach.”
In connection with the approach of the Moon’s shadow, it is to be noted
that at totality the heavens appear in a certain sense to descend upon the
Earth. If an observer is looking upwards towards the zenith over his head,
he will see the clouds appear to drop towards the Earth, and the surrounding
gloom seems also to have the effect of vitiating one’s estimate of distances.
To an observer upon a high hill, a plain below him appears to become more
distant. Although what has been called the descent of the clouds (that is to
say their appearance of growing proximity) is most manifest immediately

before the totality, yet a sense of growing nearness may sometimes be
noticed a very considerable time before the total phase is reached.
Whilst on the subject of clouds, it may be mentioned that although there
is in the vault of heaven generally during the total phase an appreciable
sensation of black darkness, more or less absolute, that is to say, either
blackish or greyish, yet in certain regions of the sky, (generally in the
direction of the horizon) the clouds, when there are any, often exhibit
colours in strata, orange hue below and red above, with indigo or grey or
black higher up still, right away to the Sun’s place. The cause of these
differences is to be found in the fact that the lower part of the atmosphere
within the area of the Moon’s shadow is, under the circumstances in
question, illuminated by light which having passed through many miles of
atmosphere near to the Earth’s surface, has lost much from the violet end of
its spectrum, leaving an undue proportion of the red end.
On certain occasions iridescent or rainbow-tinted clouds may be seen in
the vicinity of the Sun, either before, or during, or after totality, depending
on circumstances unknown. Such clouds have been observed at all these
three stages of a total eclipse. The effects of course are atmospheric, and
have no physical connection with either Sun or Moon.

THE DARKNESS OF TOTALITY.

With respect to the general darkness which prevails during totality, great
discrepancies appear in the accounts, not only as between different eclipses,
but in respect of the same eclipse observed by different people at different
places. Perhaps the commonest test applied by most observers is that of the
facility or difficulty of reading the faces of chronometers or watches.
Sometimes this is done readily, at other times with difficulty. In India in
1868, one observer stated that it was impossible to recognise a person’s face
three yards off, and lamplight was needed for reading his chronometer. On
the other hand in Spain in 1860, it was noted that a thermometer, as well as
the finest hand-writing, could be read easily. The foregoing remarks apply
to the state of things in the open air. In 1860, it was stated that inside a
house in Spain the darkness was so great that people moving about had to
take great care lest they should run violently against the household
furniture.

Perhaps on the whole it may be said that the darkness of an ordinary
totality is decidedly greater than that of a full Moon night.
Many observers have noted during totality that even when there has not
been any very extreme amount of absolute darkness, yet the ruddy light
already mentioned as prevailing towards the horizon often gives rise to
weird unearthly effects, so that the faces of bystanders assume a sickly livid
hue not unlike that which results from the light of burning salt.

METEOROLOGICAL AND OTHER EFFECTS.

It is very generally noticed that great changes take place in the
meteorological conditions of the atmosphere as an eclipse of the Sun runs
its course from partial phase to totality, and back again to partial phase. It
goes without saying that the obstruction of the solar rays by the oncoming
Moon would necessarily lead to a steady and considerable diminution in the
general temperature of the air. This has often been made the matter of exact
thermometric record, but it is not equally obvious why marked changes in
the wind should take place. As the partial phase proceeds it is very usual for
the wind to rise or blow in gusts and to die away during totality, though
there are many exceptions to this, and it can hardly be called a rule.
The depression of temperature varies very much indeed according to the
locality where the eclipse is being observed and the local thermometric
conditions which usually prevail. The actual depression will often amount
to 10° or 20° and the deposit of dew is occasionally noticed.
In addition to the general effects of a total solar eclipse on men, animals,
and plants as summarised in the extract already made from Mrs. Todd’s
book a few additional particulars may be given culled from many recorded
observations. Flowers and leaves which ordinarily close at night begin long
before totality to show signs of closing up. Thus we are told that in 1836
“the crocus, gentian and anemone partially closed their flowers and
reopened them as the phenomenon passed off: and a delicate South African
mimosa which we had reared from a seed entirely folded its pinnate leaves
until the Sun was uncovered.” In 1851 “the night violet, which shortly
before the beginning of the eclipse had little of its agreeable scent about it,
smelt strongly during the totality.”

In the insect world ants have been noticed to go on working during
totality, whilst grasshoppers are stilled by the darkness, and earth-worms
come to the surface. Birds of all kinds seem always upset in their habits,
almost invariably going to roost as the darkness becomes intensified before
totality. In 1868 “a small cock which had beforehand been actively
employed in grubbing about in the sand went to sleep with his head under
his wing and slept for about 10 minutes, and on waking uttered an
expression of surprise, but did not crow.” In 1869 mention is made of an
unruly cow “accustomed to jump into a corn-field at night” being found to
have trespassed into the said corn-field during the total phase.
The thrilling descriptions of the effects of the oncoming darkness of
totality, derived from the records of past total eclipses, are not likely to be
improved upon in the future, for we shall receive them more and more from
amateurs and less and less from astronomical experts. Every additional total
eclipse which happens testifies to the fact that the time and thoughts of
these latter classes of people will be to an increasing degree dedicated to
instrumental work rather than to simple naked eye or even telescopic
observation. The spectroscope and the camera are steadily ousting the
simple telescope of every sort and unassisted eye observations from solar
eclipse work.
Mrs. Todd has the following apt remarks by way of summary of the
results to an individual of observing a total eclipse of the Sun:—“I doubt if
the effect of witnessing a total eclipse ever quite passes away. The
impression is singularly vivid and quieting for days, and can never be
wholly lost. A startling nearness to the gigantic forces of Nature and their
inconceivable operation seems to have been established. Personalities and
towns and cities, and hates and jealousies, and even mundane hopes, grow
very small and very far away.”

Footnotes:
[13] Month. Not., R.A.S., vol. xviii. p. 251.
[14] See p. 36 (ante).

[15] Mrs. D. P. Todd, Total Eclipses of the Sun, p. 21.

CHAPTER VI.
WHAT IS OBSERVED DURING THE TOTAL PHASE OF AN ECLIPSE
OF THE SUN.

The central feature of every total eclipse of the Sun is undoubtedly the
Corona[16] and the phenomena connected with it; but immediately before
the extinction of the Sun’s light and incidental thereto there are some minor
features which must be briefly noticed.

Fig. 8.—BRUSHES OF
LIGHT.

The Corona first makes its appearance on the side of the dark Moon
opposite to the disappearing crescent, but brushes of light are sometimes
observed on the same side, along the convex limb of the disappearing
crescent. The appearance of the brushes will be sufficiently realised by an
inspection of the annexed engraving without the necessity of any further
verbal description. These brushes are little, if at all, coloured, and must not
be confused with the “Red Flames” or “Prominences” hereafter to be
described.

BAILY’S BEADS.

When the disc of the Moon has advanced so much over that of the Sun as
to have reduced the Sun almost to the narrowest possible crescent of light, it
is generally noticed that at a certain stage the crescent suddenly breaks up
into a succession of spots of light. These spots are sometimes spoken of as
“rounded” spots, but it is very doubtful whether (certainly in view of their
supposed cause) they could possibly be deemed ever to possess an outline,
which by any stretch, could be called “rounded.” Collating the recorded
descriptions, some such phrase as “shapeless beads” of light would seem to
be the most suitable designation. These are observed to form before the
total phase, and often also after the total phase has passed. Under the latter
circumstances, the beads of light eventually run one into another, like so
many small drops of water merging into one big one. The commonly
received explanation of “Baily’s Beads” is that they are no more than
portions of the Sun’s disc, seen through valleys between mountains of the
Moon, the said mountains being the cause why the bright patches are
discontinuous. It is exceedingly doubtful whether this is the true
explanation. The whole question is involved in great uncertainty, and well
deserves careful study during future eclipses; but this it is not likely to get,
in view of the current fashion of every sufficiently skilled observer
concentrating his attention on matters connected with the solar Corona
(observed spectroscopically or otherwise), to the exclusion of what may be
called older subjects of study. I will dismiss Baily’s Beads from our
consideration with the remark that the first photograph of them was
obtained at Ottumwa, Illinois, U.S., during the eclipse of 1869.

Fig. 9.—“BAILY’S BEADS,” FOUR
STAGES, AT BRIEF INTERVALS.
MAY 15, 1836.

“Baily’s Beads” received their name from Mr. Francis Baily, who, in
1836, for the first time exhaustively described them; but they were probably
seen and even mentioned long before his time. At the total eclipse of the
Sun, seen at Penobscot in North America, on October 27, 1780, they would
seem to have been noticed, and perhaps even earlier than that date.
Almost coincident with the appearance of Baily’s Beads, that is, either
just before or just after, and also just before or just after the absolute totality
(there seems no certain rule of time) jets of red flame are seen to dart out
from behind the disc of the Moon. It is now quite recognised as a certain
fact that these “Red Flames” belong to the Sun and are outbursts of
hydrogen gas. Moreover, they are now commonly called “Prominences,”
and with the improved methods of modern science may be seen almost at
any time when the Sun is suitably approached; and they are not restricted in
their appearance to the time when the Sun is totally eclipsed as was long
supposed.
I may have more to say about these Red Flames later on; but am at
present dealing only with the outward appearances of things. Carrington’s
description has been considered very apt. One which he saw in 1851 he
likened to “a mighty flame bursting through the roof of a house and blown
by a strong wind.”

Certain ambiguous phrases made use of in connection with eclipses of
ancient date may perhaps in reality have been allusions to the Red Flames;
otherwise the first account of them given with anything like scientific
precision seems to be due to a Captain Stannyan, who observed them at
Berne during the eclipse of 1706. His words are that the Sun at “his getting
out of his eclipse was preceded by a blood-red streak from its left limb
which continued not longer than six or seven seconds of time; then part of
the Sun’s disc appeared all of a sudden.”
Some subsequent observers spoke of the Red Flames as isolated jets of
red light appearing here and there; whilst others seem to have thought they
had seen an almost or quite continuous ring of red light around the Sun. The
last-named idea is now recognised as the more accurate representation of
the actual facts, the Red Flames being emanations proceeding from a sort of
shell enveloping the Sun, to which shell the name of “Chromosphere” has
now come to be applied.
As regards the Moon itself during the continuance of the total phase, all
that need be said is that our satellite usually exhibits a disc which is simply
black; but on occasions observers have called it purple or purplish.
Although during totality the Moon is illuminated by a full allowance of
Earth-shine (light reflected by the Earth into space), yet from all accounts
this is always insufficient to reveal any traces of the irregularities of
mountains and valleys, etc., which exist on the Moon.
When during totality any of the brighter planets, such as Mercury, Venus,
Mars, Jupiter, or Saturn, happen to be in the vicinity of the Sun they are
generally recognised; but the stars seen are usually very few, and they are
only very bright ones of the 1st or 2nd magnitudes. Perhaps an explanation
of the paucity of stars noticed is to be found in the fact that the minds of
observers are usually too much concentrated on the Sun and Moon for any
thought to be given to other things or other parts of the sky.
Perhaps this is a convenient place in which to recall the fact that there has
been much controversy in the astronomical world during the last 50 years as
to whether there exist any undiscovered planets revolving round the Sun
within the orbit of Mercury. Whilst there is some evidence, though slight,
that one or more such planets have been seen, opponents of the idea base

their scepticism on the fact that with so many total eclipses as there have
been since 1859 (when Lescarbault claimed to have found a planet which
has been called “Vulcan”), no certain proof has been obtained of the
existence of such a planet; and what better occasion for finding one (if one
exists of any size) than the darkness of a total solar eclipse? At present it
must be confessed that the sceptics have the best of it.

THE CORONA.

We have now to consider what I have already called the central feature of
every total eclipse. It was long ago compared to the nimbus often placed by
painters around the heads of the Virgin Mary and other saints of old; and as
conveying a rough general idea the comparison may still stand. It has been
suggested that not a bad idea of it may be obtained by looking at a Full
Moon through a wire-gauze window-screen. The Corona comes into view a
short time (usually to be measured by seconds) before the total extinction of
the Sun’s rays, lasts during totality and endures for a brief interval of
seconds (or it might be a minute) after the Sun has reappeared. It was long a
matter of discussion whether the Corona belonged to the Sun or the Moon.
In the early days of telescopic astronomy there was something to be said
perhaps on both sides, but it is now a matter of absolute certainty that it
belongs to the Sun, and that the Moon contributes nothing to the spectacle
of a total eclipse of the Sun, except its own solid body, which blocks out the
Sun’s light, and its shadow, which passes across the Earth.
Of the general appearance of the Corona some idea may be obtained
from Fig. 1 (see Frontispiece) which so far as it goes needs little or no
verbal description. Stress must however be laid on the word “general”
because every Corona may be said to differ from its immediate predecessor
and successor, although, as we shall see presently, there is strong reason to
believe that there is a periodicity in connection with Coronas as with so
many other things in the world of Astronomy. A curious point may here be
mentioned as apparently well established, namely, that when long rays are
noticed in the Corona they do not seem to radiate from the Sun’s centre as
the short rays more or less seem to do. Though the aggregate brilliancy of
the Corona varies somewhat yet it may be taken to be much about equal on
the whole to the Moon at its full. The Corona is quite unlike the Moon as
regards heat for its radiant heat has been found to be very well marked.

There is another thing connected with the Sun’s Corona which needs to
be mentioned at the outset and which also furnishes a reason for treating it
in a somewhat special manner. The usual practice in writing about science
is to deal with it in the first instance descriptively, and then if any historical
information is to be given to exhibit that separately and subsequently. But
our knowledge of the Sun’s Corona has developed so entirely by steps from
a small beginning that it is neither easy nor advantageous to keep the
history separate or in the background and I shall therefore not attempt to do
so.
Astronomers are not agreed as to what is the first record of the Corona. It
is commonly associated with a total eclipse which occurred in the 1st
century A.D. and possibly in the year 96 A.D. Some details of the discussion
will be found in a later chapter,[17] and I will make no further allusion to the
matter here. Passing over the eclipses of 968 A.D. and 1030 A.D. the records
of both of which possibly imply that the Corona was noticed, we may find
ourselves on thoroughly firm ground in considering the eclipse of April 9,
1567. Clavius, a well-known writer on chronology, undoubtedly saw then
the Corona in the modern acceptation of the word but thought it merely the
uncovered rim of the Sun. In reply to this Kepler showed by some
computations of his own, based on the relative apparent sizes of the Sun
and Moon, that Clavius’s theory was untenable. Kepler, however, put forth
a theory of his own which was no better, namely, that the Corona was due to
the existence of an atmosphere round the Moon and proved its existence.
From this time forwards we have statements, by various observers, applying
to various eclipses, of the Corona seeming to be endued with a rotatory
motion. The Spanish observer, Don A. Ulloa, in 1778, wrote thus respecting
the Corona seen in that year:—“After the immersion we began to observe
round the Moon a very brilliant circle of light which seemed to have a rapid
circular motion something similar to that of a rocket turning about its
centre.” Modern observations furnish no counterpart of these ideas of
motion in the Corona. Passing over many intervening eclipses we must note
that of 1836 (which gave us “Baily’s Beads”) as the first which set men
thinking that total eclipses of the Sun exhibited subsidiary phenomena
deserving of careful and patient attention. Such attention was given on the
occasion of the eclipses of 1842 and 1851, still however without the Corona
attracting that interest which it has gained for itself more recently. It was

noticed indeed that the Corona always first showed itself on the side of the
Moon farthest from the vanishing crescent but the full significance of this
fact was not at first realised. Mrs. Todd well remarks:—“In the early
observations of the Corona it was regarded as a halo merely and so drawn.
Its real structure was neither known, depicted, nor investigated. The earliest
pictures all show this. Preconceived ideas prejudiced the observers, and
their sketches were mostly structureless.... It should not be forgotten that the
Coronal rays project outward into space from a spherical Sun and do not lie
in a plane as they appear to the eye in photographs and drawings.” After
remarking on the value of photographs of the Corona up to a certain point
because of their automatic accuracy Mrs. Todd very sensibly says, “but
pencil drawings, while ordinarily less trustworthy because involving the
uncertain element of personal equation are more valuable in delineating the
finest and faintest detail of which the sensitive plate rarely takes note; the
vast array of both, however, shows marked differences in the structure and
form of the Corona from one eclipse to another though it has not yet
revealed rapid changes during any one observation. This last interesting
feature can be studied only by comparison of photographs near the
beginning of an eclipse track and its end, two or three hours of absolute
time apart.” Concerted efforts to accomplish this were made in 1871, 1887,
and 1889, but they broke down because the weather failed at one or other
end of the chain of observing stations and a succession of photographs not
simultaneous but separated by sufficient intervals of time could not be had.
The eclipse of 1893, however, yielded successful though negative results.
Photographs in South America compared with photographs in Africa two
hours later in time disclosed no appreciable difference in the structure of the
Corona and its streamers. The eclipse of May 28, 1900, will furnish the next
favourable opportunity for a repetition of this experiment by reason of the
fact that the line of totality begins in North America, crosses Portugal and
Spain and ceases in Africa. In other words, traverses countries eminently
calculated to facilitate the establishment of photographic observing stations
where observations can be made not simultaneously but at successive
intervals spread over several hours.
Although of course the Corona had been observed long before the year
1851, as indeed we have already seen, yet the eclipse of 1851 is the farthest
back which we can safely take as a starting-point for gathering up

thoroughly precise details, because it was the first at which photography
was brought into use. Starting, therefore, with that eclipse I want to lay
before the reader some of the very interesting and remarkable
generalisations which (thanks especially to Mr. W. H. Wesley’s skilful
review of many of the photographic results) are now gradually unfolding
themselves to astronomers. To put the matter in the fewest possible words
there seems little or no doubt that according as spots on the Sun are
abundant or scarce so the Corona when visible during an eclipse varies in
appearance from one period of eleven years to another like period. Or, to
put it in another way, given the date of a coming total eclipse we can predict
to a certain extent the probable shape and character of the Corona if we
know how the forthcoming date stands as regards a Sun-spot maximum or
minimum.
The most recent important eclipses up to date which have been observed,
namely those of April 16, 1893, Aug. 9, 1896, and Jan. 21, 1898, do not add
much to our useful records of the outward appearances presented by the
Corona. The 1896 Corona is described as intermediate between the two
Types respectively associated with years of maximum and minimum Sun-
spots, and this is as it should have been, albeit there was one extension
which reached to about two diameters of the Sun. The 1898 Corona yielded
four long Coronal streamers reaching much farther from the Sun than any
previously seen, the two longest reaching to 4½ and 6 diameters of the Sun
respectively. These dimensions are quite unprecedented.

Fig. 10.—CORONA OF 1882. (SUN-SPOT MAXIMUM.)

The application of the spectroscope to observations of eclipses of the Sun
demands a few words of notice in this place, but it would not be consistent
with the plan of this work to go into details. Though the spectroscope has
been applied under many different circumstances to different parts of the
Sun’s surroundings in connection with total eclipses yet it is in regard to the
Corona that most has been done and most has been discovered. The
substance of the discoveries made is that the Corona shines with an intrinsic
light of its own, that is to say, that it is composed of constituents whose
temperature is sufficiently elevated to be self-luminous. These constituents
are chiefly hydrogen; the body which corresponds to the line D3 (of
Fraunhofer’s scale), and which has been named “Helium”; and the body
which corresponds to the bright green line 1474 of Kirchoff’s scale and
which, since its existence was first suspected and then assured, has been
named “Coronium.”
The reader will not be surprised to learn, from what has gone before, that
an immense mass of records have accumulated respecting the appearance of
the Corona. Correspondingly numerous and divergent are the theories
which have been launched to explain the observations made. One thing is in
the highest degree probable, namely, that electricity is largely concerned.

Going back to the question of Sun-spots regarded in their possible or
probable association with the Corona, the present position of matters
appears to be this: that there is a real connection between the general form
of the Corona and disturbances on the Sun, taking Sun-spots as an
indication of solar activity. When Sun-spots are at or near their maximum,
the Corona has generally been somewhat symmetrical, with synclinal
groups of rays making angles of 45° with its general axis. On the other
hand, at the epochs of minimum Sun-spots, the Corona shows polar rifts
much more widely open, with synclinal zones making larger angles with the
axis, and being, therefore, more depressed towards the equatorial regions, in
which, moreover, there is usually a very marked extension of Coronal
matter in the form of elongated streamers reaching to several diameters of
the Sun.

Fig. 11.—CORONA OF 1867. (SUN-SPOT MINIMUM.)

This generalisation is well borne out by the maximum-epoch Coronas of
1870 and 1871, and the minimum-epoch Coronas of 1867, 1874, 1875,
1878, and perhaps 1887, and certainly 1889. On the other hand, the eclipses
of 1883, 1885 and 1886 do not strikingly confirm this theory. The eclipse of
1883 was at a time of rapidly decreasing solar activity, yet the Corona had
the features of a Sun-spot maximum. The same, though in a somewhat less
degree, may be said of the eclipses of 1885 and 1886. At the times of both
of these eclipses the solar activity was decreasing.

The forthcoming eclipse of 1900 will nearly coincide with a Sun-spot
minimum, and if the above conclusions are well founded the Corona in
1900 should resemble that of 1889, and be characterised by, amongst other
things, some very elongated groups of rays extending in nearly opposite
directions.
We are still a long way off from being able to state with perfect
confidence what the Corona is. It is certainly a complex phenomenon, and
the various streamers which we see are not, as was at one time imagined, a
simple manifestation of one radiant light. Mrs. Todd thus conveniently
summarises the present state of our knowledge:—“The true corona appears
to be a triple phenomenon. First, there are the polar rays, nearly straight
throughout their visible extent. Gradually, as these rays start out from points
on the solar disc farther and farther removed from the poles, they acquire
increasing curvature, and very probably extend into the equatorial regions,
but are with great difficulty traceable there, because projected upon and
confused with the filaments having their origin remote from the poles. Then
there is the inner equatorial corona, apparently connected intimately with
truly solar phenomena, quite like the polar rays; while the third element in
the composite is the outer equatorial corona, made up of the long ecliptic
streamers, for the most part visible only to the naked eye, also existing as a
solar appendage, and possibly merging into the zodiacal light. The total
eclipses of a half century have cleared up a few obscurities, and added
many perplexities. There is little or no doubt about the substantial, if not
entire, reality of the corona as a truly solar phenomenon. The Moon, if it
has anything at all to do with the corona, aside from the fact of its coming
in conveniently between Sun and Earth, so as to allow a brief glimpse of
something startlingly beautiful which otherwise could never have been
known, is probably responsible for only a very narrow ring of the inner
radiance of pretty even breadth all round. This diffraction effect is accepted;
but the problem still remains how wide this annulus may be, and whether it
may vary in width from one eclipse to another. These questions once
settled, the spurious structure may then be excerpted from the true. Indeed
the coronal streamers, delicately curving and interlacing, may tell the whole
story of the Sun’s radiant energy.”

Footnotes:
[16] There seems sufficient evidence to show that the Corona may be seen even
on occasions when the Sun is not totally eclipsed, provided that the visible
crescent of the Sun is exceedingly narrow.
[17] See p. 130 (post).

CHAPTER VII.
WHAT IS OBSERVED AFTER THE TOTAL PHASE OF AN ECLIPSE
OF THE SUN IS AT AN END.

In a certain sense, a description of the incidents which precede the total
disappearance of the Sun in connection with a total Eclipse will apply more
or less to the second half of the phenomenon; only, of course, in the reverse
order and on the opposite side of the compass. The Corona having appeared
first of all on the W. side of the Sun, then having shown itself complete as
surrounding the Sun, will begin to disappear on the W. side, and will be last
seen on the E. side. Baily’s Beads may or may not come into view; the Sun
will reappear first as a very thin crescent, gradually widening; the quasi-
nocturnal darkness visible on the Earth will cease, and eventually the Moon
will completely pass away from off the Sun, and the Sun once again will
exhibit a perfect circle of light.
Whilst there is so much to look for and look at and think about, one thing
must be sought for instantly after totality, or it will be gone for ever, and
that is the Moon’s shadow on the Earth. We have already seen in the last
chapter the startling rapidity and solemnity with which the shadow seems to
rush forward to the observer from the horizon on the western side of the
Meridian. Passing over him, or even, so to speak, through him, it travels
onwards in an easterly direction and very soon vanishes. Its visibility at all
depends a good deal upon whether the observer, who is looking for it, is
sufficiently raised above the adjacent country to be able to command at
least a mile or two of ground. If he is in a hollow, he will have but little
chance of seeing the shadow at all: on the other hand, if he is on the top of a
considerable hill (or high up on the side of a hill), commanding the horizon
for a distance of 10 or 20 miles, he will have a fair chance of seeing the
shadow. Sir G. B. Airy states, in 1851, “My eye was caught by a duskiness

in the S.E., and I immediately perceived that it was the Eclipse-shadow in
the air, travelling away in the direction of the shadow’s path. For at least six
seconds, this shadow remained in sight, far more conspicuous to the eye
than I had anticipated. I was once caught in a very violent hail and thunder-
storm on the Table-land of the County of Sutherland called the “Moin,” and
I at length saw the storm travel away over the North Sea; and this view of
the receding Eclipse-shadow, though by no means so dark, reminded me
strongly of the receding storm. In ten or twelve seconds all appearance of
the shadow had passed away.”
Perhaps this may be a convenient place to make a note of what seems to
be a fact, partly established at any rate, even if not wholly established,
namely—that there seems some connection between eclipses of the Sun and
Earthquakes. A German physicist named Ginzel[18] has found a score of
coincidences between solar eclipses and earthquakes in California in the
years between 1850 and 1888 inclusive. Of course there were eclipses
without earthquakes and earthquakes without eclipses, but twenty
coincidences in thirty-eight years seems suggestive of something.

Footnotes:
[18] Himmel und Erde, vol. ii. pp. 255, 309; 1890.

CHAPTER VIII.
ECLIPSES OF THE SUN MENTIONED IN HISTORY—CHINESE.

This is the first of several chapters which will be devoted to historical
eclipses. Of course the total eclipse of the Sun of August 9, 1896, observed
in Norway and elsewhere, is, in a certain sense, an eclipse mentioned in
history, but that is not what is intended by the title prefixed to these
chapters. By the term “historical eclipses,” as used here, I mean eclipses
which have been recorded by ancient historians and chroniclers who were
not necessarily astronomers, and who wrote before the invention of the
telescope. The date of this may be conveniently taken as a dividing line, so
that I shall deal chiefly with eclipses which occurred before, say, the year
1600. There is another reason why some such date as this is a suitable one
from which to take a new departure. Without at all avowing that superstition
ceased on the Earth in the year 1600 (for there is far too large a residuum
still available now, 300 years later), it may yet be said that the Revival of
Letters did do a good deal to divest celestial phenomena of those alarming
and panic-causing attributes which undoubtedly attached to them during the
earlier ages of the world and during the “Dark Ages” in Western Europe
quite as much as during any other period of the world’s history. No one can
examine the writings of the ancient Greek and Roman historians, and the
chronicles kept in the monasteries of Western Europe by their monkish
occupiers, without being struck by the influence of terror which such events
as eclipses of the Sun and Moon and such celestial visitors as Comets and
Shooting Stars exercised far and wide. And this influence overspread, not
only the unlettered lower orders, but many of those in far higher stations of
life who, one might have hoped, would have been exempt from such
feelings of mental distress as they often exhibited. Illustrations of this fact
will be adduced in due course.

It has always been supposed that the earliest recorded eclipse of the Sun
is one thus mentioned in an ancient Chinese classic—the Chou-King
(sometimes spelt Shou-Ching). The actual words used may be translated:
—“On the first day of the last month of Autumn the Sun and Moon did not
meet harmoniously in Fang.” To say the least of it, this is a moderately
ambiguous announcement, and Chinese scholars, both astronomers and
non-astronomers, have spent a good deal of time in examining the various
eclipses which might be thought to be represented by the inharmonious
meeting of the Sun and the Moon as above recorded. To cut a long story
short, it is generally agreed that we are here considering one or other of two
eclipses of the Sun which occurred in the years 2136 or 2128 B.C.
respectively, the Sun being then in the sidereal division “Fang,” a locality
determined by the stars β, δ, π, and ρ Scorpii, and which includes a few
small stars in Libra and Ophiuchus to the N. and in Lupus to the S. How
this simple and neat conclusion, which I have stated with such apparent
dogmatism, was arrived at is quite another question, and it would hardly be
consistent with the purpose of this volume to attempt to work it out in
detail, but a few points presented in a summary form may be interesting.
In the first place, be it understood, that though it is fashionable to cast
ridicule on John Chinaman, especially by way of retaliation for his calling
us “Barbarians,” yet it is a sure and certain fact that not only have the
Chinese during many centuries been very attentive students of Astronomy,
but that we Westerns owe a good deal of our present knowledge in certain
departments to the information stored up by Chinese observers during many
centuries both before and after the Christian Era.
This, however, is a digression. The circumstances of this eclipse as
regards its identification having been carefully examined by Mr. R. W.
Rothman,[19] in 1839 were further reviewed by Professor S. M. Russell in a
paper published in the proceedings of the Pekin Oriental Society.[20] The
substance of the case is that in the reign of Chung-K’ang, the fourth
Emperor of the Hsia Dynasty, there occurred an eclipse of the Sun, which is
interesting not only for its antiquity, but also for the dread fate of the two
Astronomers Royal of the period, who were taken by surprise at its
occurrence, and were unprepared to perform the customary rites. These rites
were the shooting of arrows and the beating of drums, gongs, etc., with the
object of delivering the Sun from the monster which threatened to devour it.

The two astronomers by virtue of their office should have superintended
these rites. They were, however, drunk and incapable of performing their
duties, so that great turmoil ensued, and it was considered that the land was
exposed to the anger of the gods. By way of appeasing the gods, and of
suitably punishing the two State officials for their neglect and personal
misconduct, they were forthwith put to death, a punishment which may be
said to have been somewhat excessive, in view of the fact that the eclipse
was not a total but only a partial one. An anonymous verse runs:—

Here lie the bodies of Ho and Hi,
Whose fate though sad was visible—
Being hanged because they could not spy
Th’ eclipse which was invisible.

It appears beyond all reasonable doubt that the eclipse in question
occurred on October 22, 2136 B.C. The preliminary difficulties to be got
over in arriving at the date arose from the fact that there was an uncertainty
of 108 years in the date when the Emperor Chung-K’ang ascended the
throne; and within these limits of time there were 14 possible years in
which an eclipse of the Sun in Fang could have occurred. Then the number
was further limited by the necessity of finding an eclipse which could have
been seen at the place which was the Emperor’s capital. The site of this,
again, was a matter of some uncertainty. However, step by step, by a
judicious process of exhaustion, the year 2136 B.C. was arrived at as the
alternative to the previously received date of 2128 B.C. Considering that we
are dealing with a matter which happened full 4000 years ago, it may fairly
be said that this discrepancy is not perhaps much to be wondered at, seeing
what disputes often happen nowadays as to the precise date of events which
may have occurred but a few years or even a few months before the
controversy springs up.
Professor Russell says that:—“Some admirers of the Chinese cite this
eclipse as a proof of the early proficiency attained by the Chinese in
astronomical calculations. I find no ground for that belief in the text.
Indeed, for many centuries later, the Chinese were unable to predict the
position of the Sun accurately among the stars. They relied wholly on
observation to settle their calendar, year by year, and seem to have drawn
no conclusions or deductions from their observations. Their calendar was
continually falling into confusion. Even at the beginning of this dynasty,
when the Jesuits came to China, the Chinese astronomers were unable to
calculate accurately the length of the shadow of the Sun at the equinoxes
and solstices. It seems to me therefore very improbable that they could have
been able to calculate and predict eclipses.”
I am not at all sure that this is quite a fair presentation of the case. I do
not remember ever to have seen the power to predict eclipses ascribed to the
Chinese, but it is a simple matter of fact that we owe to them during many
centuries unique records of a vast number of celestial phenomena. Their

observations of comets may be singled out as having been of inestimable
value to various 19th-century computers, especially E. Biot and J. R. Hind.
The second recorded eclipse of the Sun would seem to be also due to the
Chinese. Confucius relates that during the reign of the Emperor Yew-Wang
an eclipse took place. This Emperor reigned between 781 B.C. and 771 B.C.,
and it has been generally thought that the eclipse of 775 B.C. is the one
referred to, but Johnson doubts this on the ground that this eclipse was
chiefly visible in the circumpolar regions, and if seen at all in China must
have been of very small dimensions. He leans to the eclipse of June 4, 780
B.C. as the only large one which happened within the limits of time stated
above.
An ancient Chinese historical work, known as the Chun-Tsew, written by
Confucius, makes mention of a large number of solar eclipses which
occurred before the Christian Era. This work came under the notice of M.
Gaubil, one of the French Jesuit missionaries who laboured in China some
century and a half ago, and he first gave an account of it in his Traité de la
Chronologie Chinoise, published at Paris in 1770.[21]
The Chun-Tsew is said to be the only work really written by Kung-Foo-
Tze, commonly known as Confucius, the other treatises attributed to him
having been compiled by disciples of his either during his life-time or after
his decease. The German chronologist, Ideler, was acquainted with this
work, and in a paper of his own, presented to the Berlin Academy,
remarked:—“What gives great interest to this work is the account of 36
solar eclipses observed in China, the first of which was on Feb. 22, 720 B.C.,
and the last on July 22, 495 B.C.”
In 1863 Mr. John Williams, then Assistant Secretary of the Royal
Astronomical Society, communicated to the Society in a condensed form
the particulars of these eclipses as related in Confucius’s book, together
with some remarks on the book itself. The Chun-Tsew treats of a part of the
history of the confederated nations into which China was divided during the
Chow Dynasty, that is between 1122 B.C. and 255 B.C. The particular period
dealt with is that which extended from 722 B.C. to 479 B.C. It was during the
latter part of this interval of about 242 years that Confucius flourished. But
the book is not quite a general history for it is more particularly devoted to

the small State of Loo of which Confucius was a native, where he passed a
great portion of his life, and where he was advanced to the highest honours.
It contains the history of twelve princes of this State with incidental notices
of the other confederated nations. The number of the years of each reign is
accurately determined, and the events are classed under the years in which
they occurred. Each year is divided into sections according to the four
seasons, Spring, Summer, Autumn, Winter, and the sections are subdivided
into months, and often the days are distinguished. The name Chun-Tsew is
said to have been given to this work from its having been commenced in
Spring and finished in Autumn, but Williams thinks that the name rather
refers to the fact that its contents are divided into seasons as stated. The
style in which it is written is very concise, being a bare mention of facts
without comment, and although on this account it might appear to us dry
and uninteresting, it is much valued by the Chinese as a model of the
ancient style of writing. It forms one of the Woo-King or Five Classical
Books, without a thorough knowledge of which, and of the Sze-Shoo or
Four Books, no man can attain to any post of importance in the Chinese
Empire.
The account of each eclipse is but little more than a brief mention of its
occurrence at a certain time. The following is an example of the entries:
—“In the 58th year of the 32nd cycle in the 51st year of the Emperor King-
Wang, of the Chow Dynasty, the 3rd year of Yin-Kung, Prince of Loo, in
the spring, the second moon, on the day called Kea-Tsze, there was an
eclipse of the Sun.” This 58th year of the 32nd cycle answers to 720 B.C.
Mr. Williams in the year 1863 presented to the Royal Astronomical Society
a paper setting out the whole of the eclipses of which I have cited but one
example, converting, of course, the very complicated Chinese dates into
European dates.
These Chinese records of eclipses were in 1864 subjected to examination
by the late Sir G. B. Airy,[22] with results which were highly noteworthy,
and justify us in reposing much confidence in Chinese astronomical work.
Airy remarks:—“The period through which these eclipses extend is
included in the time through which calculations of eclipses have been made
in the French work entitled L’Art de vérifier les Dates. I have several times
had occasion to recalculate with great accuracy eclipses which are noted in
that work (edition of 1820), and I have found that, to the limits of accuracy

to which it pretends, and which are abundantly sufficient for the present
purpose, it is perfectly trustworthy. I have therefore made a comparison of
the Chun-Tsew eclipses with those of L’Art de vérifier les Dates. The result
is interesting. Of the 36 eclipses, 32 agree with those of the Art de vérifier
les Dates, not only in the day, but also in the general track of the eclipse as
given in the Art de vérifier, which appears to show sufficiently that the
eclipse would be visible in that province of China to which the Chun-Tsew
is referred.” Airy then proceeds to point out that, with regard to the four
eclipses which he could not confirm, there cannot have been eclipses in
April 645 B.C. or in June 592 B.C. It appears, however, from a note by
Williams, that the date attached to the eclipse of 645 B.C. is, in reality, an
erroneous repetition (in the Chinese mode of expressing it) of that attached
to the next following one, and in the absence of correct date it must be
rejected. In the record of 592 B.C., June 16, no clerical error is found, and
there must be an error of a different class. The eclipses of 552 B.C.,
September 19, and 549 B.C., July 18, to which there is nothing
corresponding in the Art de vérifier, are in a different category. These occur
in the lunations immediately succeeding 552 B.C., August 20, and 549 B.C.,
June 19, respectively, and there is no doubt that those which agree with the
Art de vérifier were real eclipses. Now there cannot be eclipses visible at
the same place in successive lunations, because the difference of the
Moon’s longitudes is about 29°, and the difference of latitudes is therefore
nearly 3°, which is greater than the sum of the diameters of the Sun and
Moon increased by any possible change of parallax for the same place.
These, therefore, were not real eclipses. It seems probable that the nominal
days were set down by the observer in his memorandum book as days on
which eclipses were to be looked for. Airy conjectured that the eclipses of
552 B.C., August 20, and 549 B.C., June 19, were observed by one and the
same person, and that he possessed science enough to make him connect the
solar eclipses with the change of the Moon, but not enough to give him any
idea of the limitations to the visibility of an eclipse.
On a subsequent occasion Mr. Williams laid before the Society a further
list of solar eclipses observed in China, and extending from 481 B.C. to the
Christian Era. He collected these from a Chinese historical work, entitled
Tung-Keen-Kang-Muh. This work, which runs to 101 volumes, contains a
summary of Chinese history from the earliest times to the end of the Yuen

Dynasty, A.D. 1368, and was first published about 1473. The copy in Mr.
Williams’s possession was published in 1808. The text is very briefly
worded, and consists merely of an account of the accessions and deaths of
the emperors and of the rulers of the minor states, with some of the more
remarkable occurrences in each reign. The appointments and deaths of
various eminent personages are also noticed, together with special
calamities such as earthquakes, inundations, storms, etc. The astronomical
allusions include eclipses and comets. Amongst the eclipses are also all, or
most of those which are recorded in the Chun-Tsew as having occurred prior
to 479 B.C. Though no particular expressions are used to define the exact
character of the eclipses, it is to be presumed that some of them must have
been total, because it is stated that the stars were visible, albeit that
seemingly in only one instance is a word attached which specifically
expresses the idea of totality. Here again all the dates were expressed in
Chinese style, but, as published by Williams, were rendered, as before, in
European style by aid of chronological tables, published about 1860 in
Japan. Mr. Williams, in his second paper, from which I have been quoting,
states that he brought his published account down to the Christian Era only
as a matter of convenience, but that he had in hand a further selection of
eclipses from the Tung-Keen-Kang-Muh, the interval from the Christian Era
to the 4th century A.D. yielding nearly 100 additional eclipses. This further
transcript has not yet been published, but remains in MS. in the Library of
the Royal Astronomical Society. Mr. Williams died in 1874 at the age of 77,
one of the most experienced Chinese scholars of the century.
It is remarkable that none of the Chinese annals to which reference has
been made include any mention of eclipses of the Moon; but the records of
Comets are exceedingly numerous and, as I have already stated, have
proved of the highest value to astronomers who have been called upon to
investigate the ancient history of Comets.

Footnotes:
[19] Memoirs, R.A.S., vol. xi. p. 47.
[20] Republished in the Observatory Magazine, vol. xviii. p. 323, et seq., 1895.

[21] A good deal of information respecting Chinese eclipse records, so far as
known up to the beginning of the 19th-century, will be found in Delambre’s
Histoire de l’Astronomie Ancienne. Paris, 1817.
[22] Month. Not., R.A.S., vol. xxiv. p. 41.

CHAPTER IX.
ARE ECLIPSES ALLUDED TO IN THE BIBLE?

An interesting question has been suggested: Are there any allusions to
eclipses to be found in Holy Scripture? It seems safe to assert that there is at
least one, and that there may be three or four.
In Amos viii. 9 we read:—“I will cause the Sun to go down at noon, and I
will darken the Earth in the clear day.” This language is so very explicit and
applies so precisely to the circumstances of a solar eclipse that
commentators are generally agreed that it can have but one meaning;[23] and
accordingly it is considered to refer without doubt to one or other of the
following eclipses:—791 B.C., 771 B.C., 770 B.C., or 763 B.C. Archbishop
Usher,[24] the well-known chronologist, suggested the first three more than
two centuries ago, whilst the eclipse of 763 B.C. was suggested in recent
times and is now generally accepted as the one referred to. The
circumstances connected with the discovery and identification of the eclipse
of 763 B.C. are very interesting.
The date when Amos wrote is set down in the margin of our Bibles as
787 B.C. and if this date is correct it follows that for his statement to have
been a prediction he must be alluding to some eclipse of later date than 787
B.C. This obvious assumption not only shuts out the eclipse of 791 B.C., but
opens the door to the acceptance of the eclipse of 763 B.C.
Apparently the first modern writer who looked into the matter after
Archbishop Usher was the German commentator Hitzig who suggested the
eclipse of Feb. 9, 784 B.C. Dr. Pusey was so far taken with this idea that he
thought it worth while to secure the co-operation of the Rev. R. Main,
F.R.A.S., the Radcliffe Observer at Oxford, for the purpose of a full
investigation. Mr. Main had the circumstances of that eclipse calculated,

with the result that though the eclipse was indeed total in Africa and
Hindostan, yet at Samaria it was only partial and of no considerable
magnitude. Dr. Pusey’s words, summing up the situation are:—“The eclipse
then would hardly have been noticeable at Samaria, certainly very far
indeed from being an eclipse of such magnitude, as could in any degree
correspond with the expression, ‘I will cause the Sun to go down at noon.’”
... “Beforehand, one should not have expected that an eclipse of the Sun,
being itself a regular natural phenomenon, and having no connection with
the moral government of God, should have been the subject of the prophet’s
prediction. Still it had a religious impressiveness then, above what it has
now, on account of that wide-prevailing idolatry of the Sun. It exhibited the
object of their false worship, shorn of its light, and passive.”
Dr. Pusey’s Commentary from which the above quotation is made[25]
bears the date 1873, but he appears not to have been acquainted with the
important discovery announced no less than six years previously by the
distinguished Oriental scholar, Sir H. C. Rawlinson. The discovery to which
I allude is a contemporary record on an Assyrian tablet of a solar eclipse
which was seen at Nineveh about 24 years after the reputed date of Amos’s
prophecy. This tablet had been described by Dr. Hinckes in the British
Museum Report for 1854 but its chronological importance had not then
been realised. Sir H. Rawlinson[26] speaks of the tablet as a record of or
register of the annual archons at Nineveh. He says:—“In the eighteenth year
before the accession of Tiglath-Pileser there is a notice to the following
effect—‘In the month Sivan an eclipse of the Sun took place’ and to mark
the great importance of the event a line is drawn across the tablet although
no interruption takes place in the official order of the Eponymes. Here then
we have notice of a solar eclipse which was visible at Nineveh which
occurred within 90 days of the (vernal) equinox (taking that as the normal
commencement of the year) and which we may presume to have been total
from the prominence given to the record, and these are conditions which
during a century before and after the era of Nabonassar are alone fulfilled
by the eclipse which took place on June 15, 763.”
This record was submitted to Sir G. B. Airy and Mr. J. R. Hind, and the
circumstances of the eclipse were computed by the latter, by the aid of
Hansen’s Lunar Tables and Le Verrier’s Solar Tables. The result, when
plotted on a map, showed that the shadow line just missed the site of

Nineveh, but that a very slight and unimportant deviation from the result of
the Tables would bring the shadow over the city of Nineveh where the
eclipse was observed, and over Samaria where it was predicted. The
identification of this eclipse, both as regards its time and place, has also
proved a matter of importance in the revision of Scripture chronology, by
lowering, to the extent of 25 years, the reigns of the kings of the Jewish
monarchy. The need for this revision is further confirmed, if we assume that
the celebrated incident in the life of King Hezekiah, described as the
retrogradation of the Sun’s shadow on the dial of Ahaz, is to be interpreted
as connected with a partial eclipse of the Sun.
We will now consider this event, and see what can be made out of it. One
Scripture record (2 Kings xx. 11) is as follows:—“And Isaiah the prophet
cried unto the Lord: and he brought the shadow ten degrees backward, by
which it had gone down in the dial of Ahaz.” This passage has greatly
exercised commentators of all creeds in different ages of the Church; and
the most divergent opinions have been expressed as to what happened. This
has been due to two causes jointly. Not only is the occurrence
incomprehensible, looked at on the surface of the words, but we are entirely
ignorant of the construction of the so-called “dial” of Ahaz, and have little
or no material directly available from outside sources to enable us to come
to a clear and safe conclusion. No doubt, however, it was a sun-dial, or
gnomon of some kind. Bishop Wordsworth lays stress on the apparent
assertion that the miracle was not wrought on any other dial at Jerusalem
except that of Ahaz, the father of Hezekiah, and he treats as a confirmation
of this the statement in 2 Chron. xxxii. 31, that ambassadors came from
Babylon to Jerusalem, being curious to learn all about “the wonder that had
been done in the land” (i.e. in the land of Judah). But there is more taken for
granted here than is necessary, or, as we shall presently see, is justifiable. To
begin with, how do we know that there was any other dial at Jerusalem like
that of Ahaz? But, in point of fact, we must make a new departure
altogether, for it has been suggested (I know not exactly by whom, or when
for the first time) that an eclipse of the Sun, under certain circumstances,
would explain all that happened, and reconcile all that has to be reconciled.
What happened to Hezekiah is thought by many to imply clearly a miracle,
and it may be said that an eclipse of the Sun cannot be held to be a
miracle[27] by the ordinary definition of the word. But, on the other hand, it

certainly might count as such in the eyes of ignorant spectators, who know
nothing of the theory or practice of eclipses, and who would regard such a
thing as quite unforeseen, unexpected, and alarming. Illustrations of this
might be multiplied from all parts of the world, in all ages of the world’s
history.
Let us see now what the argument is, as it was worked out by the late Mr.
J. W. Bosanquet, F.R.A.S. Shortly before the invasion of Judæa by
Sennacherib—say in the beginning of the year 689 B.C.—Hezekiah was sick
unto death. In answer to his fervent prayer for recovery the prophet Isaiah
was sent to him with this message:—“Thus saith the Lord, the God of
David thy Father, I have heard thy prayer, I have seen thy tears; behold, I
will add unto thy days fifteen years ... and I will defend this city, and this
shall be a sign unto thee from the Lord, that the Lord will do this thing that
He hath spoken. Behold, I will bring again the shadow of the degrees,
which is gone down in the sun-dial of Ahaz ten degrees backward. So the
Sun returned ten degrees, by which degrees it had gone down.” (Isaiah
xxxviii. 5-8).
In these words we evidently have mention of some instrument erected in
Hezekiah’s palace, in the days of his father Ahaz, for showing the change in
the position of the shadow cast by the Sun from day to day. This statement
is confirmed by a profane writer, Glycas, who states: “They say that Ahaz,
by some contrivance, had erected in his palace certain steps, which showed
the hours of the day, and also measured the course of the Sun.”
The idea involved in “bringing again,” through “ten degrees backward,”
“the shadow of the degrees” which had gone down, is very noteworthy. We
seem intended to learn from these words several things. For one thing (to
begin with) that the steps (as we must consider them to have been) on this
sun-dial of Ahaz, were turned away from the Sun. For only in that position
could they cast their shadow, or could the number of the illuminated steps
be varied, upwards or downwards, according to the varying altitude of the
sun. The only conceivable use of a fixed instrument so placed would be to
show the rise and fall of the shadow from day to day, as the Sun on the
meridian gradually rose higher between mid-winter and mid-summer, or
descended lower between mid-summer and mid-winter, in passing of course
through the winter and summer solstices in turn. No simple motion of the

Sun in its ordinary diurnal progress would produce the effect described. On
the other hand, it is equally clear that the shadow cast by a gnomon properly
adjusted at the head of such a series of steps would travel upwards and
downwards upon the steps “with the Sun,” from winter to summer and from
summer to winter, indicating at each noon the meridian altitude of the Sun
from day to day, the latitude of Jerusalem being 31° 47′, and the Sun’s
altitude there on the shortest day being 34° 41′. If the gnomon were raised
above the topmost step so as to bring the tip of the gnomon or any aperture
in it so much above the step as would be the equivalent of 2° 54′ or slightly
more, then the top of the shadow of the gnomon (or a spot of light passing
through a hole in it) would, on the shortest day of the year, fall just beyond
the lowermost step. An instrument constructed on the principle just set forth
was known to and used by the Greek astronomers of antiquity under the
name of a Sciotheron or shadow-taker. Sometimes, and perhaps more
properly, it was called a Heliotropion, that is, an instrument designed to
indicate the turning of the Sun at the Tropics.[28] This, be it remembered,
was information needed by the ancients for the correct regulation of the
seasons of the year, and of special service to the Jews whose greater
festivals were fixed in connection with the seasons. There is reason to
believe that instruments of this character were of early invention, going
back perhaps to the times of Homer, for we find a passage in the Odyssey,
(xv. 403) as follows:—
“Above Ortygia lies an isle of fame
Far hence remote, and Syria [Syros] is the name;
There curious eyes inscrib’d with wonder trace
The Sun’s diurnal and his summer race.”

Pope’s rendering of this passage fails, however, to bring out the salient
idea involved. Butcher and Lang translate the passage thus:—“There is a
certain isle called Syria, if haply thou hast heard tell of it, over above
Ortygia, and there are the turning-places of the Sun.” Merry[29] calls these
island names mere “inventions of the poet.” It seems to me a great question
whether Homer’s words really support the statement I have made just
before quoting it.
Diogenes Laërtius refers to this same instrument when he speaks of the
Heliotropion preserved in the Island of Syra.[30]

According to Laërtius, Anaximander[31] was the first Greek to use
gnomons, which he placed on the Sciothera of Lacedæmon, for the express
purpose of indicating the Tropics and Equinoxes. These Sciothera were
pyramidal in form.
An obelisk was the simplest, though an imperfect form of Heliotropion,
marking indistinctly the length of a shadow at different times of the year,
especially the extremes of length and shortness at mid-winter and mid-
summer. It is perhaps interesting to mention that travellers have recorded, in
various places, various devices for furnishing information respecting these
matters. For instance, in Milan Cathedral the meridian line is marked on the
pavement, and along this line, an image of the Sun coming through an
aperture in the southern wall travels backwards and forwards during the
year according to the seasons. Some Jesuit missionaries who visited China
about the middle of the last century, noticed a device of this character in
operation at the Observatory at Pekin. A gnomon had been set up in a low
room and one of the missionaries, M. Le Comte, describes in the following
words what they saw in connection with this gnomon:—“The aperture
through which the rays of the Sun came was about 8 ft. above the floor; it is
horizontal and formed of two pieces of copper, which may be turned so as
to be farther from, or closer to, each other to enlarge or contract the
aperture. Lower was a table with a brass plate in the middle on which was
traced a meridian line 15 ft. long, divided by transverse lines which are
neither finished nor exact. All round the table there are small channels to
receive the water, whereby it is to be levelled.”[32]
All this may seem rather a digression, and so it is, but I am following Mr.
Bosanquet herein in order the better to justify the argument that it was an
eclipse of the Sun which marked the important incident in Hezekiah’s life
which has been handed down to us by the sacred writer. It is evident that if
a flight of steps were erected on the principles which were set forth above,
the steps sloping upwards and southwards (for the Northern Hemisphere)
from the lowest step to within a few inches below an aperture in the
gnomon suitably arranged, the ray or image of the Sun, whichever it was,
would travel day by day up and down such steps between solstice and
solstice. We may conclude, therefore, that the instrument which Hezekiah
gazed at, and which is called in Scripture, the “Dial” of Ahaz, was what the
Greeks would have termed a Heliotropion.

The historian’s record is to the effect that on the day of Hezekiah’s
recovery an extraordinary motion of the shadow was observed on the “Steps
of Ahaz” by the rising of the shadow “ten steps” from the point to which it
had “gone down with the Sun.” This effect is spoken of not as a miracle but
as “a sign.” It should also be remembered that the cure of Hezekiah was
effected not by a miracle but by a simple application of a lump of figs. The
promise of his recovery was confirmed by the motion of the shadow as
already stated. We are justified, therefore, in looking for some ordinary
natural phenomenon by which to account for this peculiar motion on the
dial, and something miraculous is not essential. Dean Milman once
suggested that the effect might have been produced “by a cloud refracting
the light.” No doubt a dark cloud might produce an apparent interference
with the shadow, but it is well pointed out by Bosanquet that such a cause
as a cloud would have been so manifest to everyone, and the effect so
transient, that the phenomenon could hardly have been referred to
afterwards as it was in another place as “a wonder that was done in the
land.” (2 Chron. xxxii. 31).
It becomes, therefore, alike an obvious and a simple explanation that a
shadow caused by the Sun might be deflected downwards on such an
instrument with a regular and steady motion by the Moon passing slowly
over the upper part of the Sun’s disc, as Sun and Moon both approached the
meridian.
The critical question has now to be raised: “Can astronomers inform us
whether a considerable eclipse of the Sun occurred at the beginning of the
year 689 B.C. anywhere near noon and which was visible at Jerusalem?”
And the answer to this it is interesting to be able to say is a plain and
distinct affirmative. There was a large partial eclipse of the Sun on January
11, 689 B.C., about 11.30 A.M., and it was the upper limb which underwent
eclipse.
This eclipse fulfils all the requirements of the case, both from the
historian’s and the astronomer’s point of view. It occurred about the year
fixed by Demetrius as that of Hezekiah’s illness: it occurred while the Sun
was approaching and actually passing the meridian; the obscuration was on
that part of the Sun’s disc (namely the upper part) which would have had
the effect of causing the point of light, which would seem to emanate from

the Sun, to appear to be depressed downwards; and it was visible at
Jerusalem. But there still remains for consideration the final and most
important question, “Would a deflection of light proceeding from the Sun,
regarded as a moving body, be capable of affecting, to the extent of ‘ten
steps,’ the shadow on such an instrument as has been described?” And
arising out of this, there is the subordinate question, “Would January, being
the month when this eclipse certainly occurred, also be a month suitable for
the exhibition of such a phenomenon?”
It is ascertainable by calculation that the time occupied by the Moon in
passing over the Sun, in the way it did during this eclipse, was about 2½
hours. But from the time of central conjunction, when the obscuration was
the greatest and the point of light depressed the most, to the time when the
uppermost portion of the Sun’s disc was released by the eastward motion of
the Moon, and the light from that uppermost portion was again manifest,
was about 20 minutes, and this, therefore, was the time during which the
phenomenon of retrogression on the “steps” would have been exhibited to
the King’s eyes. Assuming then that the time when the ascending shadow
had travelled upwards to the tenth step coincided, or nearly so, with the
time when the Sun had reached its highest altitude for the day, at noon, we
infer that the time of central conjunction during this eclipse was not later
than from 20 to 15 minutes before noon. It could not have been much
earlier, because the phenomenon of the resting of the shadow for a time at
its apparently highest point for the day (which preceded the promise that it
should rise ten steps) has also to be accounted for, and this cessation of its
motion upwards could not have taken place till about 25 minutes before
noon, when the decreasing motion of the Sun in altitude (or its slackening
motion upwards as it approached mid-day) would have become
counteracted by the coming on of the eclipse. Now at 11.35 A.M. the sun’s
disc would have risen to the altitude of 35° 8′; and the highest visible point
of light would, owing to the eclipse, then have been about 35° 4′; and at
11.40 A.M., being the time of greatest obscuration, the extreme cusps of light
produced by the intervention of the Moon would still have stood at about
35° 4′, just 23′ below the highest point of light at noon (Fig. 12). The whole
disc of the sun had now risen above the gnomon, yet no motion of the
shadow on the steps had been observed for fully five minutes. The time
shown by the dial was seemingly mid-day.

Fig. 12.—ECLIPSE OF THE SUN, JANUARY 11, 689 B.C., AT JERUSALEM.

We have now to consider “to what extent would a staircase rising at an
angle of 31° 47′ towards the Sun, with a gnomon so placed at the top as to
cast a shadow to the foot of the lower step on the shortest day of the year be
affected by a movement in a perpendicular direction of the point of light to
the extent of 23′, or ⅓ of a degree”? The effect would be widely different at
different times of the year, being greatest at mid-winter when the shadows
are longest, and least at mid-summer when the shadows are shortest. It
follows from this that January 13 being a day but three weeks removed
from mid-winter day the normal shadow would be not far from its longest
possible length, and the effect of a displacement of 23′ would be neither
more nor less than 1⁄12th of the whole range of the steps whatever that range
might have been. This extent of motion, then, is fully sufficient to satisfy
the condition prescribed by the Biblical narrative of there being such a
deflection of the Sun’s light as would affect the shadow to the extent
implied by the words “ten steps” or “ten degrees,” which is virtually the
same idea. The same extent of motion could not have been produced under
the same conditions either a few days earlier or a few days later; that may
certainly be taken for granted. And the only point in which we are
necessarily in doubt arises from the fact that we are ignorant of the actual

number and nature of the graduations of Ahaz’s so-called “Dial.” If it were
permissible to assume that there were 120 graduations on the instrument, be
they steps properly so-called on a structure erected in the open air or be
they lines on a flat surface on some instrument standing in a room, or what
not, then the problem is solved, for 1⁄12 (as above) of 120 is ten—the “ten
degrees” stated in the history.
As to whether the “dial” of Ahaz was a device built up of masonry in the
open air or was an instrument for indoor use we know absolutely nothing,
and speculation is useless. There is something to be said on both sides.
Bosanquet, on abstract grounds, leans to the latter view; on the other hand
he calls attention to the present existence in India, at Delhi and Benares, of
ruined Hindoo observatories in the form of huge masonry sun-dials many
yards in length and breadth and height.[33]
Finally it may be pointed out that there is some incidental confirmation to
be found for this Hezekiah incident having happened in winter. That the
season of the year was winter seems to be suggested by the word used in the
original Hebrew in connection with the return of the shadow.
“Backward” in Isaiah xxxviii. 8 might also be translated, “From the end.”
It would be very natural to hold that this implied that the motion of the
shadow was upwards from the lower end of the group of steps towards
which the shadow had gone down. Now the lower end of the steps could
only have been the place of the shadow in December or January at or near
the time of the winter solstice. Moreover the mention of the “lump of figs”
seems to suggest the winter season. A cake of figs means dried figs, not
newly gathered summer figs.
Putting all the facts together we may fairly conclude that the
astronomical event which happened in connection with Hezekiah’s illness
was an eclipse of the Sun, and that its date was January 11, 689 B.C.
A few other Scripture passages need a passing mention. In Isaiah xiii. 10
we read:—
“The Sun shall be darkened in his going forth, and the Moon shall not
cause her light to shine.” It has been thought by Johnson that this passage is
an allusion to an eclipse of the Sun, and so it might be; but on the other

hand, it may be no more than one of those highly figurative phrases which
abound in holy Scripture, and of which the well-known passage, “The stars
in their courses fought against Sisera” (Judges v. 20), is a familiar example.
In Jeremiah x. 2 we read:—
“Be not dismayed at the signs of heaven; for the heathen are dismayed at
them.” This is cited as an eclipse allusion by Johnson, who points out that
the utterance of this caution preceded by about fifteen years the celebrated
eclipse of Thales (585 B.C.). But surely this is far-fetched. I shall be inclined
to attach the same criticism to his next citation. Ezekiel employs these
expressions:—“When I shall put thee out, I will cover the heaven, and make
the stars thereof dark; I will cover the Sun with a cloud, and the Moon shall
not give her light” (xxxii. 7). This language resembles, in no small degree,
Isaiah’s, already quoted, and, like that, might apply to the phenomenon of a
solar eclipse, but whether that was actually the prophet’s intention is
another matter. He may have witnessed the eclipse of 585 B.C. on the banks
of the river Chebar, and that spectacle may have put this imagery into his
head. Further than this it seems hardly safe to go.
This seems an appropriate place to mention a very interesting matter, to
which attention has been called by Oriental scholars in recent times, who
have investigated Assyrian and Egyptian monuments, and other monuments
of the same type. The story would be a long and interesting one if presented
in detail, and would far exceed my limits of space. I must, therefore, be
content with such a summary as that which has been worked out by Mr.
E. W. Maunder. Briefly the facts are these. There are to be found in many
places carvings in stone, symbolic of the Sun-god once worshipped in the
East. The general design, with of course variations, is a circle with striated
wings extending right and left to two diameters of the wing, more or less,
with a lesser extension in a downward direction. Allowing for the roughness
of the art, and for the fact that the material was stone, it does not require
any very great stretch of imagination to see in these carvings the disc of a
totally-eclipsed Sun with, right and left and below it, that form of corona
which we have come to associate with total eclipses occurring at periods of
Sun-spot minima.[34] This idea should not seem far-fetched if we bear in
mind the fact that the ancient Orientals worshipped the Sun, Moon, and

Planets; and one of the natural outcomes of this is submitted for our
consideration by Maunder in the words following[35]:—
“There can be little doubt that the Sun was regarded partly as a symbol,
partly as a manifestation of the unseen, unapproachable Divinity. Its light
and heat, its power of calling into active exercise the mysterious forces of
germination and ripening, the universality of its influence, all seemed the fit
expressions of the yet greater powers which belonged to the Invisible. What
happened in a total solar eclipse? For a short time that which seemed so
perfect a divine symbol was completely hidden. The light and heat, the two
great forms of solar energy, were withdrawn, but something took their
place. A mysterious light of mysterious form, unlike any other light, unlike
any other single form, was seen in its place. Could they fail to see in this a
closer, a more intimate revelation, a more exalted symbolism of the Divine
Nature and Presence? Just as in the various Greek ‘mysteries’ the student
was gradually advanced from one set of symbols to another even more
abstruse and esoteric, so here, on the broad face of heaven itself,
vouchsafed for a brief space of time and at long intervals apart, the Deity
revealed Himself to the initiated by a higher and more difficult symbol than
ordinarily. The symbol would vary in shape. We may take it for granted that
the old Chaldeans, as modern astronomers to-day, had at one time or
another presented to them every type of Coronal structure. But there would,
no doubt, be a difficulty in grasping or remembering the irregular details of
the Corona as seen in most eclipses. It occasionally happens, however, that
the Corona shows itself under a form of grand and striking simplicity. It is
now widely recognised that the typical Corona of the minimum of the Sun-
spot cycle consists chiefly of two great equatorial streamers.”
Maunder then goes on to cite certain American pictures by Trouvelot and
others of the eclipse of July 29, 1878, in which the great extension of the
Corona to the East and the West is specially shown. One drawing in
particular, by Miss K. E. Wolcott, exhibits the Sun with a perfect bright ring
round it from which the Coronal streamers emanate in the directions
mentioned. Maunder then remarks that he has a strong conviction that it
was a Corona of this type which was the origin of the “Ring with Wings,”
the symbol which on Assyrian monuments is always shown as floating over
the head of the ring which is designed to indicate the presence and
protection of the Deity. In the article cited he gives illustrations of two

forms under which the “Ring with Wings” appears on Assyrian and
Egyptian monuments respectively, remarking that “Egyptians too were
Astronomers and Sun-worshippers and were experts in the language of
symbols. Equally with the Chaldeans the Egyptian priests should have
regarded the Corona as a symbolical revelation of the Deity whose usual
manifestation they recognised in the Sun, and accordingly we find them
employing a symbol which is almost as perfect a representation of the
Corona of minimum as that which the Assyrians adopted.” Another curious
point commented upon by Maunder is that the Assyrians frequently insert
the figure of their Deity within the ring, and attach thereto a kilt-like dress.
Even when they show the ring without the figure the “kilt,” as it may be
called, is still there, indicating that it is not simply a garment worn by the
figure, but an integral part of the symbol. This “kilt” is represented as
pleated, and the resemblance of the pleatings to the polar rays shown in
Trouvelot’s drawing of the Corona, is “practically perfect.” On this point
Maunder adds:—“If this be a mere chance coincidence, it seems to me a
most extraordinary one.” He concludes by saying that these symbols, so
frequently met with, and so clearly designed to indicate the presence of the
Deity, “are, in their origin, drawings of the solar Corona, as seen at the Sun-
spot minimum, and as such are the earliest eclipse representations which
have been preserved to us.”
I give these ideas for what they are worth; they are very ingeniously
worked out, and though the argument is not conclusive, yet I do think that
there is enough in it to be worth attention.

Footnotes:
[23] Less certain is the allusion in Amos v. 8:—“Seek him that ... maketh the day
dark with night.”
[24] Annales, A.M., 3213, p. 45. Folio Ed.
[25] Minor Prophets, p. 217.
[26] Athenæum, May 18, 1867.
[27] After all, do the circumstances necessarily presuppose a “miracle”?
Hezekiah had only asked for a “sign.” In 2 Chron. xxxii. 31 the word “wonder”
is applied to the event.

[28] Hence the word “Tropic,” from τρέπω (I turn).
[29] Homer, Odyssey, vol. ii. p. 255. Clarendon Press Series.
[30] Life of Pherecydes, sec. 6.
[31] Life of Anaximander, sec. 3.
[32] Du Halde’s “China,” 3rd edition, 1741, vol. iii. p. 86.
[33] Paper by W. Hunter in Asiatic Researches, vol. v., p. 190. The Benares
Observatory is described by Sir R. Barker in Phil. Trans., vol. lxvii., p. 598.
1777.
[34] See p. 70 (ante).
[35] Knowledge, vol. xx., p. 9, January 1897.

CHAPTER X.
ECLIPSES OF THE SUN MENTIONED IN HISTORY—CLASSICAL.

In this chapter we shall, for the most part, be on firmer ground than
hitherto, because several of the most eminent Greek and Latin historians
have left on record full and circumstantial accounts of eclipses which have
come under their notice, and which have been more or less completely
verified by the computations and researches of astronomers in modern
times. But these remarks do not, however, quite apply to the first eclipse
which will be mentioned.
Plutarch, in his Life of Romulus, refers to some remarkable incident
connected, in point of time at any rate, with his death:—“The air on that
occasion was suddenly convulsed and altered in a wonderful manner, for
the light of the Sun failed, and they were involved in an astonishing
darkness, attended on every side with dreadful thunderings and tempestuous
winds.” This so-called darkness is considered to have been the same as that
mentioned by Cicero.[36] There is so much myth about Romulus that it is
not safe to write in confident language. Nevertheless it is a fact, according
to Johnson, that there was a very large eclipse of the Sun visible at Rome in
the afternoon of May 26, 715 B.C., and 715 B.C. is supposed to have been the
year, or about the year, of the death of Romulus. Plutarch is also responsible
for the statement that a great eclipse of the Sun took place sometime before
the birth of Romulus; and if there is anything in this statement Johnson
thinks that the annular eclipse of November 28, 771 B.C., might meet the
circumstances of the case, but too much romance attaches to the history of
Romulus for anyone to write with assurance respecting the circumstances of
his career. Much of it is generally considered to be fabulous.

In one of the extant fragments of the Greek poet Archilochus (said to be
the first who introduced iambics into his verses), the following sentence
occurs:—“Zeus the father of the Olympic Gods turned mid-day into night
hiding the light of the dazzling sun; an overwhelming dread fell upon men.”
The poet’s language may evidently apply to a total eclipse of the Sun; and
investigations by Oppolzer and Millosevich make it probable that the
reference is to the total eclipse of the Sun which happened on April 6, 648
B.C. This was total at about 10 a.m. at Thasos and in the northern part of the
Ægean Sea. The acceptance of this date displaces by about half a century
the date commonly assigned for the poet’s career, but this is not thought to
be of much account having regard to the hazy character of Grecian
chronology before the Persian wars.[37]
On May 28, 585 B.C. there occurred an eclipse the surrounding
circumstances of which present several features of particular interest. One
of the most celebrated of the astronomers of antiquity was Thales of
Miletus, and his astronomical labours were said to have included a
prediction of this eclipse, which moreover has the further interest to us that
it has assisted chronologists and historians in fixing the precise date of an
important event in ancient history. Herodotus[38] describing a war which
had been going on for some years between the Lydians and the Medes gives
the following account of the circumstances which led to its premature
termination:—“As the balance had not inclined in favour of either nation,
another engagement took place in the sixth year of the war, in the course of
which, just as the battle was growing warm, day was suddenly turned into
night. This event had been foretold to the Ionians by Thales of Miletus, who
predicted for it the very year in which it actually took place. When the
Lydians and Medes observed the change they ceased fighting, and were
alike anxious to conclude peace.” Peace was accordingly agreed upon and
cemented by a twofold marriage. “For (says the historian) without some
strong bond, there is little security to be found in men’s covenants.” The
exact date of this eclipse was long a matter of discussion, and eclipses
which occurred in 610 B.C. and 593 B.C. were each thought at one time or
another to have been the one referred to. The question was finally settled by
the late Sir G. B. Airy, after an exhaustive inquiry, in favour of the eclipse
of 585 B.C. This date has the further advantage of harmonising certain

statements made by Cicero and Pliny as to its having happened in the 4th
year of the 48th Olympiad.
Another word or two may be interesting as regards the share which
Thales is supposed to have had in predicting this eclipse, the more so, that
very high authorities in the domains of astronomy, and chronology, and
antiquities take opposite sides in the matter. Sir G. C. Lewis, Bart., M.P.,
may be cited first as one of the unbelievers. He says[39] that Thales is
“reported to have predicted it to the Ionians. If he had predicted it to the
Lydians, in whose country the eclipse was to be total, his conduct would be
intelligible, but it seems strange that he should have predicted it to the
Ionians who had no direct interest in the event.” Bosanquet replies to this
by pointing out that Miletus, in Ionia, was the birthplace of Thales, and also
that a shadow, covering two degrees of latitude, passing through Ionia,
would also necessarily cover Lydia.
Another dissentient is Sir H. C. Rawlinson,[40] who, remembering that
Thales is said to have predicted a good olive crop, and Anaxagoras the fall
of an aërolite, says:—“The prediction of this eclipse by Thales may fairly
be classed with the prediction of a good olive crop, or the fall of an aërolite.
Thales, indeed, could only have obtained the requisite knowledge for
predicting eclipses from the Chaldeans; and that the science of these
astronomers, although sufficient for the investigation of lunar eclipses, did
not enable them to calculate solar eclipses—dependent as such a calculation
is, not only on the determination of the period of recurrence, but on the true
projection also of the track of the Sun’s shadow along a particular line over
the surface of the earth—may be inferred from our finding that in the
astronomical canon of Ptolemy, which was compiled from the Chaldean
registers, the observations of the Moon’s eclipse are alone entered.”
Airy[41] replied to these observations as follows:—“I think it not at all
improbable that the eclipse was so predicted, and there is one easy way, and
only one of predicting it—namely, by the Saros, or period of 18 years, 10
days, 8 hours nearly. By use of this period an evening eclipse may be
predicted from a morning eclipse but a morning eclipse can rarely be
predicted from an evening eclipse (as the interval of eight hours after an
evening eclipse will generally throw the eclipse at the end of the Saros into
the hours of night). The evening eclipse, therefore, of B.C. 585, May 28,

which I adopt as being most certainly the eclipse of Thales, might be
predicted from the morning eclipse of B.C. 603, May 17.... No other of the
eclipses discussed by Baily and Oltmanns present the same facility for
prediction.”
Xenophon[42] mentions an eclipse as having led to the capture by the
Persians of the Median city Larissa. In the retreat of the Greeks on the
eastern side of the Tigris, they crossed the river Zapetes and also a ravine,
and then reached the Tigris. According to Xenophon, they found at this
place a large deserted city formerly inhabited by the Medes. Its wall was 25
feet thick and 100 feet high; its circumference 2 parasangs [= 7½ miles]. It
was built of burnt brick on an under structure of stone 20 feet in height.
Xenophon then proceeds to say that “when the Persians obtained the
Empire from the Medes, the King of the Persians besieged the city but was
unable by any means to take it till a cloud having covered the Sun and
caused it to disappear completely, the inhabitants withdrew in alarm, and
thus the city was captured. Close to this city was a pyramid of stone, one
plethrum in breadth, two plethra in height.... Thence the Greeks proceeded
six parasangs to a great deserted castle by a city called Mespila formerly
inhabited by the Medes; the substructure of its wall was of squared stone
abounding in shells ... the King of the Persians besieged it but could not
take it; Zeus terrified the inhabitants with thunderbolts, and so the city was
taken.”
The minute description here given by Xenophon enabled Sir A. H.
Layard, Captain Felix Jones, and others, to identify Larissa with the modern
Nimrud and Mespila with Mosul. A suspicion is thrown out in some
editions of the Anabasis that the language cited might refer to an eclipse of
the Sun. It is to be noted, however, that it is not included by Ricciolus in the
list of eclipses mentioned in ancient writers which he gives in his
Almagestum Novum. Sir G. B. Airy, having had his attention called to the
matter, examined roughly all the eclipses which occurred during a period of
40 years, covering the supposed date implied by Xenophon. Having
selected two, he computed them accurately but found them inapplicable. He
then tried another (May 19, 557 B.C.) which he had previously passed over
because he doubted its totality, and he had the great satisfaction of finding
that the eclipse, though giving a small shadow, had been total, and that it

had passed so near to Nimrud that there could be no doubt of its being the
eclipse sought.
Sir G. B. Airy was such a very careful worker and investigator of eclipses
that his conclusions in this matter have met with general acceptance. It
must, however, in fairness be stated that a very competent American
astronomer, Professor Newcomb, has expressed doubts as to whether after
all Xenophon’s allusion is to an eclipse, but, judging by his closing words,
the learned American does not seem quite satisfied with his own scepticism,
for he says—“Notwithstanding my want of confidence, I conceive the
possibility of a real eclipse to be greater than in the eclipse of Thales, while
we have the great advantages that the point of occurrence is well defined,
the shadow narrow, and, if it was an eclipse at all, the circumstance of
totality placed beyond serious doubt.”[43]
In the same year as that in which, according to the common account, the
battle of Salamis was fought (480 B.C.), there occurred a phenomenon which
is thus adverted to by Herodotus[44]—“At the first approach of Spring the
army quitted Sardis and marched towards Abydos; at the moment of its
departure the Sun suddenly quitted its place in the heavens and disappeared
though there were no clouds in sight and the day was quite clear; day was
thus turned into night.” We are told[45] that “As the king was going against
Greece, and had come into the region of the Hellespont, there happened an
eclipse of the Sun in the East; this sign portended to him his defeat, for the
Sun was eclipsed in the region of its rising, and Xerxes was also marching
from that quarter.” So far as words go these accounts admirably befit a total
eclipse of the Sun, but regarded as such it has given great trouble to
chronologers, and the identification of the eclipse is still uncertain. Hind’s
theory is that the allusion is to an eclipse and in particular to the eclipse of
February 17, 478 B.C. Though not total at Sardis yet the eclipse was very
large, 94⁄100ths of the Sun being covered. If we accept this, it follows that the
usually recognised date for the battle of Salamis must be altered by two
years. Airy thought it “extremely probable” that the narrative related to the
total eclipse of the Moon, which happened on March 13, 479 B.C., but this is
difficult to accept, especially as Plutarch, in his Life of Pelopidas, says
—“An army was soon got ready, but as the general was on the point of
marching, the Sun began to be eclipsed, and the city was covered with
darkness in the daytime.” This seems explicit enough, assuming the record

to be true and that the same incident is referred to by Plutarch as by
Herodotus and Aristides.
Since the time when Airy and Hind examined this question, all the known
facts have been again reviewed by Mr. W. T. Lynn, who pronounces, but
with some hesitation, in favour of the eclipse of October 2, 480 B.C., as the
one associated with the battle of Salamis. He does this by refusing to see in
the above quotations from Herodotus any allusion to a solar eclipse at all,
but invites us to consider a later statement in Herodotus[46] as relating to an
eclipse though the historian only calls it a prodigy.
After the battle of Thermopylæ the Peloponnesian Greeks commenced to
fortify the isthmus of Corinth with the view of defending it with their small
army against the invading host of Xerxes. The Spartan troops were under
the command of Cleombrotus, the brother of Leonidas, the hero of
Thermopylæ. He had been consulting the oracles at Sparta, and Herodotus
states that “while he was offering sacrifice to know if he should march out
against the Persian, the Sun was suddenly darkened in mid-sky.” This
occurrence so frightened Cleombrotus that he drew off his forces and
returned home. It is uncertain from the narrative of Herodotus whether
Cleombrotus returned to Sparta in the autumn of the year of the battle of
Salamis, or in the spring of the next following year which was that in which
the battle of Platæa was fought. Bishop Thirlwall[47] thinks that it was the
latter, but Lynn pronounces for the former, adding that the date may well
have been in October, and the solar eclipse of October 2, 480 B.C. may have
been the phenomenon which attracted notice, particularly as the Sun would
have been high in the heavens, the greatest phase (6⁄10ths) occurring,
according to Hind, at 50 minutes past noon. Here I must leave the matter,
merely remarking that this alternative explanation obviates the necessity for
disturbing the commonly received date of the battle of Salamis.
Thucydides states that during the Peloponnesian war “things formerly
repeated on hearsay, but very rarely confirmed by facts, became not
incredible, both about earthquakes and eclipses of the Sun which came to
pass more frequently than had been remembered in former times.” One
such eclipse he assigns to the first year of the war and says[48] that “in the
same summer, at the beginning of a new lunar month (at which time alone
the phenomenon seems possible) the Sun was eclipsed after mid-day, and

became full again after it had assumed a crescent form and after some of the
stars had shone out.” Aug. 3, 431 B.C. is generally recognised as the date of
this event. The eclipse was not total only three-fourths of the Sun’s disc
being obscured. Venus was 20° and Jupiter 43° distant from the Sun, so
probably these were the “stars” that were seen. This eclipse nearly
prevented the Athenian expedition against the Lacedæmonians. The sailors
were frightened by it, but a happy thought occurred to Pericles, the
commander of the Athenian forces. Plutarch, in his Life of Pericles, says:
—“The whole fleet was in readiness, and Pericles on board his own galley,
when there happened an eclipse of the Sun. The sudden darkness was
looked upon as an unfavourable omen, and threw the sailors into the
greatest consternation. Pericles observing that the pilot was much
astonished and perplexed, took his cloak, and having covered his eyes with
it, asked him if he found anything terrible in that, or considered it as a bad
presage? Upon his answering in the negative, he said, ‘Where is the
difference, then between this and the other, except that something bigger
than my cloak causes the eclipse?’”
Another eclipse is mentioned by Thucydides[49] in connection with an
expedition of the Athenians against Cythera. He says:—“At the very
commencement of the following summer there was an eclipse of the Sun at
the time of a new moon, and in the early part of the same month an
earthquake.” This has been identified with the annular eclipse of March 21,
424 B.C., the central line of which passed across Northern Europe. It is not
quite clear whether the historian wishes to insinuate that the eclipse caused
the earthquake or the earthquake the eclipse.
An eclipse known as that of Ennius is another of the eclipses antecedent
to the Christian Era which has been the subject of full modern investigation,
and the circumstances of which are such that, in the language of Professor
Hansen, “it may be reckoned as one of the most certain and well-established
eclipses of antiquity.” The record of it has only been brought to light in
modern times by the discovery of Cicero’s Treatise, De Republicâ.
According to Cicero,[50] Ennius the great Roman poet, who lived in the
second century B.C., and who died of gout contracted, it is said, by frequent
intoxication, recorded an interesting event in the following words:—Nonis
Junii soli luna obstetit et nox, “On the Nones of June the Moon was in
opposition to the Sun and night.” This singular phrase has long been

assumed to allude to an eclipse of the Sun, but the precise interpretation of
the words was not for a long time realised. In Cicero’s time the Nones of
June fell on the 5th, but in the time of Ennius, who lived a century and a
half before Cicero, the Nones of June fell between June 5 and July 4 on
account of the lunar years and the intercalary month of the Roman
Calendar. The date of this eclipse is distinctly known to be June 21, 400
B.C., but the hour was long in dispute. Professor Zech found that the Sun set
at Rome eclipsed, and that the maximum phase took place after sun-set.
Hansen, however, with his better Tables, found that the eclipse was total at
Rome, and that the totality ended at 7.33 p.m., the Sun setting almost
immediately afterwards at 7.36. This fact, Hansen considers, explains the
otherwise unintelligible passage of Ennius quoted above: instead of saying
et nox, he should have said et simul nox, “and immediately it was night.”
Newcomb questions the totality of this eclipse, but assigns no clear reasons
for his doubts.[51]
On August 14, 394 B.C., there was a large eclipse of the Sun visible in the
Mediterranean. It occurred in the forenoon, and is mentioned by
Xenophon[52] in connection with a naval engagement in which the Persians
were defeated by Conon.
Plutarch, in his Life of Pelopidas, relates how one, Alexander of Pheræ,
had devastated several cities of Thessaly, and that as soon as the oppressed
inhabitants had learned that Pelopidas had come back from an embassy on
which he had been to the King of Persia, they sent deputies to him to
Thebes to beg the favour of armed assistance, with Pelopidas as general.
“The Thebans willingly granted their request, and an army was soon got
ready, but as the general was on the point of marching, the Sun began to be
eclipsed, and the city was covered with darkness in the day-time.” This
eclipse is generally identified with that of July 13, 364 B.C. If this is correct,
Plutarch’s language must be incorrect, or at least greatly exaggerated, for no
more than about three-fourths of the Sun was obscured.
On February 29, 357 B.C., there happened an eclipse, also visible in or
near the Mediterranean. This is supposed to have been the eclipse for the
prediction of which Helicon, a friend of Plato, received from Dionysius,
King of Syracuse, payment in the shape of a talent.

We have now to consider another ancient eclipse which has a history of
peculiar interest as regards the investigations to which it has been subjected.
It is commonly known as the “Eclipse of Agathocles,” and is recorded by
two historians of antiquity in the words following. Diodorus Siculus[53]
says:—
“Agathocles also, though closely pursued by the enemy, by the advantage
of the night coming on (beyond all hope), got safe off from them. The next
day there was such an eclipse of the Sun, that the stars appeared everywhere
in the firmament, and the day was turned into night, upon which
Agathocles’s soldiers (conceiving that God thereby did foretell their
destruction) fell into great perplexities and discontents concerning what was
like to befall them.”
Justin says[54]:—
“By the harangue the hearts of the soldiers were somewhat elevated, but
an eclipse of the Sun that had happened during their voyage still possessed
them with superstitious fears of a bad omen. The king was at no less pain to
satisfy them about this affair than about the war, and therefore he told them
that he should have thought this sign an ill presage for them, if it had
happened before they set out, but having happened afterwards he could not
but think it presaged ill to those against whom they marched. Besides,
eclipses of the luminaries always signify a change of affairs, and therefore
some change was certainly signified, either to Carthage, which was in such
a flourishing condition, or to them whose affairs were in a very ruinous
state.”
The substance of these statements is that in the year 310 B.C. Agathocles,
Tyrant of Syracuse, while conducting his fleet from Syracuse to the Coast
of Africa, found himself enveloped in the shadow of an eclipse, which
evidently, from the accounts, was total. His fleet had been chased by the
Carthaginians on leaving Syracuse the preceding day, but got away under
the cover of night. On the following morning about 8 or 9 a.m. a sudden
darkness came on which greatly alarmed the sailors. So considerable was
the darkness, that numerous stars appeared. It is not at the first easy to
localise the position of the fleet, except that we may infer that it could
hardly have got more than 80 or at the most 100 miles away from the

harbour of Syracuse where it had been closely blockaded by a Carthaginian
fleet. Agathocles would not have got away at all but for the fact that a
relieving fleet was expected, and the Carthaginians were obliged to relax
their blockade in order to go in search of the relieving fleet. Thus it came
about not only that Agathocles set himself free, but was able to retaliate on
his enemies by landing on the coast of Africa at a point near the modern
Cape Bon, and devastating the Carthaginian territories. The voyage thither
occupied six days, and the eclipse occurred on the second day. Though we
are not informed of the route followed by Agathocles, that is to say whether
he passed round the North or the South side of the island of Sicily, yet it has
been made clear by astronomers that the southern side was that taken.
Baily, who was the first modern astronomer to investigate the
circumstances of this eclipse, found that there was an irreconcilable
difference between the path of the shadow found by himself and the
historical statement, a gap of about 180 geographical miles seeming to
intervene between the most southerly position which could be assigned to
the fleet of Agathocles, and the most northerly possible limit of the path of
the eclipse shadow. This was the condition of the problem when Sir G. B.
Airy took it up in 1853.[55] He, however, was able to throw an entirely new
light upon the matter. The tables used by Baily were distinctly inferior to
those now in use, and Sir G. B. Airy thought himself justified in saying that
to obviate the discordance of 180 miles just referred to “it is only necessary
to suppose an error of 3′ in the computed distances of the Sun and Moon at
conjunction, a very inconsiderable correction for a date anterior to the
epoch of the tables by more than twenty-one centuries.”
It deserves to be mentioned, though the point cannot here be dwelt upon
at much length, that these ancient eclipses all hang together in such a way
that it is not sufficient for the man of Astronomy and the man of
Chronology to agree on one eclipse, unless they can harmonise the facts of
several.
For instance, the eclipse of Thales, the date of which was long and much
disputed, has a material bearing on the eclipse of Agathocles, the date of
which admits of no dispute; and one of the problems which had to be solved
half a century ago was how best to use the eclipse of Agathocles to
determine the date of that of Thales. If 610 B.C. were accepted for the Thales

eclipse, so as to throw the zone of total darkness anywhere over Asia Minor
(where for the sake of history it was essential to put it) the consequence
would be that the shadow of the eclipse of 310 B.C. would have been thrown
so far on to land, in Africa, as to make it out of the question for Agathocles
and his fleet to have been in it, yet we know for a certainty that he was in it
in that year, and no other year. Conversely, if 603 B.C. were accepted for the
Thales eclipse, then to raise northwards the position of the shadow in that
year from the line of the Red Sea and the Persian Gulf, that it might pass
through Asia Minor, would so raise the position of the shadow in 310 B.C. as
to throw it far too much to the N. of Sicily for Agathocles, who we know
must have gone southwards to Africa, to have entered it. But if we assume
585 B.C. as the date of the eclipse of Thales, we obtain a perfect
reconciliation of everything that needs to be reconciled; the shadow of the
eclipse of 585 B.C. will be found to have passed where ancient history tells
us it did pass—namely, through Ionia, and therefore through the centre of
Asia Minor, and on the direct route from Lydia to Media; whilst we also
find that the shadow of the 310 B.C. eclipse, that is the one in the time of
Agathocles, passed within 100 miles of Syracuse, a fact which is stated
almost in those very words by the two historians who have recorded the
doings of Agathocles and his fleet in those years.
This is where the matter was left by Airy in 1853. Four years later the
new solar and lunar tables of the German astronomer Hansen were
published, and having been applied to the eclipse of 585 B.C., the
conclusions just stated were amply confirmed. As if to make assurance
doubly sure, Airy went over his ground again, testing his former
conclusions with regard to the eclipse of Thales by the eclipse of Larissa, in
557 B.C. already referred to, and bringing in the eclipse of Stiklastad in 1030
A.D., to be referred to presently. And as the final result, it may be stated that
all the foregoing dates are now known to an absolute certainty, especially
confirmed as they were in all essential points by a computer of the
eminence of the late Mr. J. R. Hind.
On a date which corresponds to February 11, 218 or 217 B.C., an eclipse
of the Sun, which was partial in Italy, is mentioned by Livy.[56] Newcomb
found that the central line passed a long way from Italy, to wit, “far down in
Africa.”

An eclipse of the Sun is mentioned by Dion Cassius[57] as having
happened when Cæsar crossed the Rubicon, a celebrated event made use of
by speakers, political and otherwise, on endless occasions in modern
history. There seems no doubt that the passage of the Rubicon took place in
51 B.C., and that the eclipse must have been that of March 7, 51 B.C. The
circumstances of this eclipse have been investigated by Hind, who found
that the eclipse was an annular one, the annular phase lasting 6½ minutes in
Northern Italy.
Arago associates the death of Julius Cæsar in 44 B.C. with an annular
eclipse of the Sun, but seemingly without sufficient warrant. The actual
record is to the effect that about the time of the great warrior’s death there
was an extraordinary dimness of the Sun. Whatever it was that was noticed,
clearly it could not have been an annular eclipse, because no such eclipse
then happened. Johnson suggests that Arago confused the record of some
meteorological interference with the Sun’s light with the annular eclipse
that happened seven years previously when Cæsar passed the Rubicon, to
which eclipse allusion has already been made. That there was for a long
while a great deficiency of sunshine in Italy about the time of Cæsar’s death
seems clear from remarks made by Pliny, Plutarch, and Tibullus, and the
words of Suetonius seem to imply something of a meteorological character.
I should not have mentioned this matter at all, but for Arago’s high repute as
an astronomer. According to Seneca[58] during an eclipse a comet was also
seen.
It is an interesting question to inquire whether any allusions to eclipses
are to be found in Homer, and no very certain answer can be given. In the
Iliad (book xvii., lines 366-8) the following passage will be found:—“Nor
would you say that the Sun was safe, or the Moon, for they were wrapt in
dark haze in the course of the combat.”
In the Odyssey (book xx., lines 356-7) we find:—“And the Sun has
utterly perished from heaven and an evil gloom is overspread.” This was
considered by old commentators to be an allusion to an eclipse, and in the
opinion of W. W. Merry[59] “this is not impossible, as they were celebrating
the Festival of the New Moon.”

Certainly this language has somewhat the savour of a total eclipse of the
Sun, but it is difficult to say whether the allusion is historic, as of a fact that
had happened, or only a vague generality. Perhaps the latter is the most
justifiable surmise.
I have in the many preceding pages been citing ancient eclipses, for the
reason, more or less plainly expressed, that they are of value to astronomers
as assisting to define the theory of the Moon’s motions in its orbit, and this
they should do; but it is not unreasonable to bring this chapter to a close by
giving the views of an eminent American astronomer as to the objections to
placing too much reliance on ancient accounts of eclipses. Says Prof. S.
Newcomb[60]:—“The first difficulty is to be reasonably sure that a total
eclipse was really the phenomenon observed. Many of the statements
supposed to refer to total eclipses are so vague that they may be referred to
other less rare phenomena. It must never be forgotten that we are dealing
with an age when accurate observations and descriptions of natural
phenomena were unknown, and when mankind was subject to be imposed
upon by imaginary wonders and prodigies. The circumstance which we
should regard as most unequivocally marking a total eclipse is the visibility
of the stars during the darkness. But even this can scarcely be regarded as
conclusive, because Venus may be seen when there is no eclipse, and may
be quite conspicuous in an annular or a considerable partial eclipse. The
exaggeration of a single object into a plural is in general very easy. Another
difficulty is to be sure of the locality where the eclipse was total. It is
commonly assumed that the description necessarily refers to something
seen where the writer flourished, or where he locates his story. It seems to
me that this cannot be safely done unless the statement is made in
connection with some battle or military movement, in which case we may
presume the phenomena to have been seen by the army.”

Footnotes:
[36] De Republicâ, Lib. vi., cap. 22.
[37] E. Millosevich, Memorie della Societa Spettroscopisti Italiani, vol. xxii. p.
70. 1893.
[38] Herodotus, Book i., chap. 74. This eclipse is also mentioned by Pliny (Nat.
Hist., Book ii., chap. 9) and by Cicero (De Divinatione, cap. 49).

[39] Astronomy of the Ancients, p. 88.
[40] Herodotus, edited by Rev. G. Rawlinson, vol. i. p. 212.
[41] Month. Not., R.A.S., vol. xviii. p. 148; March 1858.
[42] Anabasis, Lib. iii., cap. 4, sec. 7.
[43] Washington Observations, 1875, Appendix II., p. 31.
[44] Book vii., chap. 37. See Rawlinson’s Herodotus, vol. iv. p. 39.
[45] Scholia, in Aristidis Orationes, Ed. Frommel, p. 222.
[46] Book ix., chap. 10. See Rawlinson’s Herodotus, 3rd ed. vol. iv. p. 379.
[47] History of Greece, vol. ii. p. 330.
[48] Book ii., chap. 28.
[49] Book iv., chap. 52.
[50] De Republicâ, Lib. i. c. 16.
[51] Washington Observations, 1875, Appendix II., p. 33.
[52] Hellenics, Book iv., chap. 3, sec. 10.
[53] Bibliothecæ Historicæ, Lib. xx., cap. 1, sec. 5.
[54] Historia, Lib. xxii., cap. 6.
[55] Phil. Trans., vol. cxliii. pp. 187-91, 1853.
[56] Hist. Rom., Lib. xxii., cap. 1.
[57] Hist. Rome, Book xli., chap. 14.
[58] Naturalium Questionum, Lib. vii.
[59] Homer, Odyssey, vol. ii. p. 328. Clarendon Press Series.
[60] Washington Observations, 1875, Appendix II., p. 18.

CHAPTER XI.
ECLIPSES OF THE SUN MENTIONED IN HISTORY.—THE
CHRISTIAN ERA TO THE NORMAN CONQUEST.

The Christian Era is, for several reasons, a suitable point of time from
which to take a new departure in speaking of historical eclipses, although
the First Century, at least, might obviously be regarded as belonging to
classical history—but let that pass.
Dion Cassius[61] relates that on a date corresponding to March 28, A.D. 5,
the Sun was partly eclipsed. Johnston says that the central line passed over
Norway and Sweden. It seems, perhaps, a little strange that a writer who
lived in Bithynia in the 3rd Century of the Christian Era should have picked
up any information about something that happened in the extreme North of
Europe two centuries previously. But probably the eclipse must have been
seen in Italy.
On November 24, A.D. 29, there happened an eclipse of the Sun which is
sometimes spoken of as the “eclipse of Phlegon.” Eusebius, the
ecclesiastical historian, records Phlegon’s testimony. Phlegon was a native
of Tralles in Lydia, and one of the Emperor Adrian’s freedmen. The eclipse
in question happened at noon, and the stars were seen. It was total, and the
line of totality, according to Hind,[62] passed across the Black Sea from near
Odessa to Sinope, thence near the site of Nineveh to the Persian Gulf. A
partial eclipse with four-fifths of the Sun’s diameter covered was visible at
Jerusalem. This is the only solar eclipse which was visible at Jerusalem
during the period usually fixed for Christ’s public ministry. This eclipse was
for a long time, and by various writers, associated with the darkness which
prevailed at Jerusalem on the day of our Lord’s Crucifixion, but there seems
no warrant whatever for associating the two events. The Crucifixion

darkness was assuredly a supernatural phenomenon, and there is nothing
supernatural in a total eclipse of the Sun. To this it may be added that both
Tertullian at the beginning of the 3rd century and Lucian, the martyr of
Nicomedia, who died in 312, appealed to the testimony of national archives
then in existence, as witnessing to the fact that a supernatural darkness had
prevailed at the time of Christ’s death. Moreover, the generally recorded
date of the Crucifixion, namely, April 3, A.D. 33, would coincide with a full
Moon. As it happened, that full Moon suffered eclipse, but she emerged
from the Earth’s shadow about a quarter of an hour before she rose at
Jerusalem (6 h. 36 m. p.m.): the penumbra continued upon her disc for an
hour afterwards.
Speaking of the Emperor Claudius, Dion Cassius[63] says:—“There was
going to be an eclipse on his birthday. Claudius feared some disturbance, as
there had been other prodigies, so he put forth a public notice, not only that
the obscuration would take place and about the time and magnitude of it,
but also about the causes which produce such events.” This is an interesting
statement, especially in view of what I have said on a previous page about
the indifference of the Romans to Astronomy. It would, likewise, be
interesting to know how Claudius acquired his knowledge, and who
coached him up in the matter. This eclipse occurred on August 1, A.D. 45.
Barely half the Sun’s diameter was covered.
Philostratus[64] states that “about this time while he was pursuing his
studies in Greece such an omen was observable in the heavens. A crown
resembling Iris surrounded the disc of the Sun and darkened its rays.”
“About this time” is to be understood as referring to some date shortly
preceding the death of the Emperor Domitian which occurred on September
18, A.D. 96. This has usually been regarded as the earliest allusion to what
we now call the Sun’s “Corona”; or, as an alternative idea, that the allusion
is simply to an annular eclipse of the Sun. But both these theories have been
called in question; by Johnston because he cannot find an eclipse which in
his view of things will respond as regards date to the statement of
Philostratus, and by Lynn on the same ground and on other grounds, more
suo. The question of identification requires looking into more fully. There
was a total eclipse on May 21, A.D. 95, but it was only visible as a partial
eclipse in Western Asia and not visible at all in Greece. This is given as the
conclusion arrived at by the German astronomer Ginzel. But it does not

seem to me sufficient to overthrow, without further investigation, the fairly
plain language of Philostratus, which is possibly confirmed by a passage in
Plutarch[65] in which he discusses certain eclipse phenomena in the light of
a recent eclipse. The date of Plutarch’s “recent” eclipse is somewhat
uncertain, but that fact does not necessarily militate against his testimony
respecting the Corona or what is regarded to have been such. The statement
of Philostratus, treated as a mention of a total solar eclipse, is accepted as
sufficiently conclusive by Sir W. Huggins and the late Professor R. Grant.
Johnston, to meet the supposed difficulty of finding an eclipse to accord
with the assertion of the historian, suggests that “perhaps some peculiar
solar halo or mock Sun, or other meteorological formation” is referred to.
But Stockwell has advanced very good reasons for the opinion that the
eclipse of Sept. 3, A.D. 118, fully meets the circumstances of the case.
Grant’s opinion is given in these emphatic words:—“It appears to me that
the words here quoted [from Apollonius] refer beyond all doubt to a total
eclipse of the Sun, and thus the phenomenon seen encompassing the Sun’s
disc was, really as well as verbally, identical with the modern Corona.”[66]
With the end of the first century of the Christian Era we may be said to
quit the realms of classical history and to pass on to eclipse records of a
different character, and, so far as regards European observations, of
comparatively small scientific value or usefulness. Our information is
largely derived from ecclesiastical historians and, later on, from monkish
chronicles, which as a rule are meagre in a surprising degree. Perhaps I
ought not to say “surprising,” because after the times of the Greek
astronomers (who in their way may almost be regarded as professionals),
and after the epoch of the famous Ptolemy, Astronomy well-nigh ceased to
exist for many centuries in Europe, until, say, the 15th century, barring the
labours of the Arabians and their kinsmen the Moors in Spain in the 9th and
following centuries.
In examining therefore the records of eclipses which have been handed
down to us from A.D. 100 forwards through more than 1000 years, I shall
not offer my readers a long dry statement of eclipse dates, but only pick out
here and there such particular eclipses as seem to present details of interest
for some or other reason.

On April 12, 237 A.D., there was, according to Julius Capitolinus, an
eclipse of the Sun, so great “that people thought it was night, and nothing
could be done without lights.” Ricciolus remarked that this eclipse
happened about the time of the Sixth Persecution of the Christians, and
when the younger Gordian was proclaimed Emperor, after his father had
declined the proffered dignity, being 80 years of age. The line of totality
crossed Italy about 5 p.m. in the afternoon, to the N. of Rome, and
embraced Bologna.
Calvisius records, on the authority of Cedrenus, an eclipse of the Sun on
August 6, 324 A.D., which was sufficiently great for the stars to be seen at
mid-day. The eclipse was associated with an earthquake, which shattered
thirteen cities in Campania. Johnston remarks that no more than three-
fourths of the Sun’s disc would have been covered, as seen in Campania,
but that elsewhere in Italy, at about 3 p.m., the eclipse was much larger, and
perhaps one or two of the planets might have been visible.
On July 17, 334 A.D., there was an eclipse, which seems to have been
total in Sicily, if we may judge from the description given by Julius
Firmicus.[67]
Ammianus Marcellinus[68] describes an eclipse, to which the date of
August 28, 360 A.D., has been assigned. Humboldt, quoting this historian,
says that the description is quite that of a solar eclipse, but its stated long
duration (daybreak to noon), and the word caligo (fog or mist) are awkward
factors. Moreover, the historian associates it with events which happened in
the eastern provinces of the Roman Empire; but Johnston seems in effect to
challenge Marcellinus’s statement when he says, “It is true that there was an
annular eclipse of the Sun in the early morning on the above date, but it
could only be seen in countries E. of the Persian Gulf.”
About the time that Alaric, King of the Visigoths appeared before Rome,
there was a gloom so great that the stars appeared in the daytime. This
narrative is considered to apply to an eclipse of the Sun, which occurred on
June 18, 410 A.D. The eclipse was an annular one, but as the central line
must have crossed far S. of Rome, the stars must have been seen not at
Rome but somewhere else.

An eclipse occurred on July 19, 418 A.D., which is remarkable for a
twofold reason. People had an opportunity not only of seeing an eclipse, but
also a comet. We owe the account of the circumstances to Philostorgius,[69]
who tells us that—“On July 19, towards the 8th hour of the day, the Sun
was so eclipsed, that even the stars were visible. But at the same time that
the Sun was thus hid, a light, in the form of a cone was seen in the sky;
some ignorant people called it a comet, but in this light we saw nothing that
announced a comet, for it was not terminated by a tail; it resembled the
flame of a torch, subsisting by itself, without any star for its base. Its
movement too was very different from that of a comet. It was first seen to
the E. of the equinoxes; after that, having passed through the last star in the
Bear’s tail, it continued slowly its journey towards the W. Having thus
traversed the heavens, it at length disappeared, having lasted more than four
months. It first appeared about the middle of the summer, and remained
visible until nearly the end of autumn.”
Boillot, a French writer, has suggested that this description is that of the
zodiacal light, but this seems out of the question in view of the details given
by the Chinese of a comet having been visible in the autumn of this year for
11 weeks, and having passed through the square of Ursa Major. Reverting
to the eclipse—Johnston finds that the greatest phase at Constantinople,
which was probably the place of observation, occurred at about half an hour
after noon, when a thin crescent of light might have been seen on the
northern limb of the Sun. From this it would appear that the central line of
eclipse must have passed somewhat to the south of Constantinople. To the
same effect Hind, who found that 95⁄100ths of the Sun’s diameter was covered
at Constantinople.
An eclipse of the Sun seems to be referred to by Gregorius Turonensis,
when he says[70] that:—“Then even the Sun appeared hideous, so that
scarcely a third part of it gave light, I believe on account of such deeds of
wickedness and shedding of innocent blood.” This would seem to have been
the eclipse which occurred on February 24, 453 A.D., when Attila and the
Huns were ravaging Italy, and to them it was doubtless that the writer
alluded. At Rome three-fourths of the Sun’s disc would have been eclipsed
at sunset, a finding which tallies fairly with the statement of Gregorius.

It is not till far into the 6th century that we come upon a native English
record of an eclipse of the Sun as having been observed in England. This
deficiency in our national annals is thus judiciously explained and
commented on by our clever and talented American authoress.[71] Speaking
of the eclipse of February 15, 538 A.D., she says:—“The accounts, however,
are greatly confused and uncertain, as would perhaps be natural fully 60
years before the advent of St. Augustine, and when Britain was helplessly
harassed with its continual struggle in the fierce hands of West Saxons and
East Saxons, of Picts and conquering Angles. Men have little time to record
celestial happenings clearly, much less to indulge in scientific comment and
theorising upon natural phenomena, when the history of a nation sways to
and fro with the tide of battle, and what is gained to-day may be fatally lost
to-morrow. And so there is little said about this eclipse, and that little is
more vague and uncertain even than the monotonous plaints of Gildas—the
one writer whom Britain has left us, in his meagre accounts of the conquest
of Kent, and the forsaken walls and violated shrines of this early epoch.”
The well-known Anglo-Saxon Chronicle[72] is our authority for this
eclipse having been noted in England, but the record is bare indeed:—“In
this year the Sun was eclipsed 14 days before the Calends of March from
early morning till 9 a.m.” Tycho Brahe, borrowing from Calvisius, who
borrowed from somebody else, says that the eclipse happened “in the 5th
year of Henry, King of the West Saxons, at the 1st hour of the day till nearly
the 3rd, or immediately after sunrise.” Johnson finds that at London nearly
three-fourths of the Sun’s disc was covered at 7.43 a.m.
The next eclipse recorded in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle is somewhat
difficult to explain. It is said that in 540 A.D. “The Sun was eclipsed on the
12th of the Calends of July [= June 20], and the stars appeared full nigh half
an hour after 9 a.m.” Johnson’s calculations make the middle of the eclipse
to have occurred at about 7.37 a.m. at London, two-thirds of the Sun’s
diameter being covered. He notes that the Moon’s semi-diameter was nearly
at its maximum whilst the Sun’s semi-diameter was nearly at its minimum
—a favourable combination for a long totality. The visibility of the stars
seems difficult to explain in connection with this eclipse, and therefore he
suggests that the annalist has made a mistake of four years and meant to
refer to the eclipse of September 1, 536 A.D., but this does not seem a
satisfactory theory.

The year after Pope Martin held a Synod to condemn the Monothelite
heresy, an eclipse of the Sun took place. It is mentioned by Tycho Brahe in
his catalogue of eclipses as having been seen in England. Johnson gives the
date as February 6, 650 A.D., and finds that the Sun was three-fourths
obscured at London at 3.30 p.m.
The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle tells us under the year A.D. 664 that, “In this
year the Sun was eclipsed on the 5th of the Nones of May; and Earcenbryht,
King of the Kentish people died and Ecgbryht his son succeeded to the
Kingdom.” Kepler thought this eclipse had been total in England, and
Johnson calculating for London found that on May 1, at 5 p.m., there would
only have been a very thin crescent of the Sun left uncovered on the
southern limb, so that the line of totality would have passed across the
country some distance to the N. of London.
The eclipse of Dec. 7, A.D. 671, seems to be associated with a comic
tragedy. The Caliph Moawiyah had a fancy to remove Mahomet’s pulpit
from Medina to his own residence at Damascus. “He said that the walking-
stick and pulpit of the Apostle of God should not remain in the hands of the
murderers of Othman. Great search was made for the walking-stick, and at
last they found it. Then they went in obedience to his commands to remove
the pulpit, when immediately, to their great surprise and astonishment, the
Sun was eclipsed to that degree that the stars appeared.”[73] Once again the
question of visible stars is in some sense a source of difficulty. Hind found
that the eclipse was annular on the central line. At Medina the greatest
phase occurred at 10h. 43m. a.m. when 85⁄100ths of the Sun’s diameter was
obscured. Hind suggests that in the clear skies of that part of the world such
a degree of eclipse might be sufficient to bring out the brighter planets or
stars. At any rate no larger eclipse visible at Medina occurred about this
epoch. Prof. Ockley seems to refer to this eclipse in making, on the
authority of several Arabian writers, the mention he does of an eclipse in
the quotation just given.
Perhaps this will be a convenient place to bring in some remarks on
certain Arabian observations of eclipses only made known to the scientific
world in modern times. That the Arabians were very capable practical
astronomers has long been recognised as a well-established fact, and if it
had not been for them there would have been a tremendous blank in the

history of astronomy during at least six centuries from about the year A.D.
700 onwards. In the year 1804 there was published at Paris a French
translation of an Arabian manuscript preserved at the University of Leyden
of which little was known until near the end of the last century. The
manuscript was then sent to Paris on loan to the French Government which
caused a translation to be made by “Citizen” Caussin, and this was
published under the title of Le Livre de la grande Table Hakénate.[74]
Caussin was Professor of Arabic at the College of France. Newcomb
considers this to contain the earliest exact astronomical observations of
eclipses which have reached us. He remarks that some of the data left us by
Ptolemy, Theon, Albategnius and others may be the results of actual
observations, but in no case, so far as is known, have the figures of the
actual observations been handed down. For example, we cannot regard
“midnight” nor “the middle of an eclipse” as moments capable of direct
observation without instruments of precision; but in the Arabian work under
consideration we find definite statements of the altitudes of the heavenly
bodies at the moments of the beginning and ending of eclipses—data not
likely to be tampered with in order to agree with the results of calculation.
The eclipses recorded are 28 in number and usually the beginning and end
of them were observed. The altitudes are given sometimes only in whole
degrees, sometimes in coarse fractions of a degree. The most serious source
of error to be confronted in turning these observations to account arises
from the uncertainty as to how long after the first contact the eclipse was
perceived and the altitude taken; and how long before the true end was the
eclipse lost sight of. Making the best use he could of the records available
Newcomb found that they could safely be employed in his investigations
into the theory of the Moon.
The observations were taken, some at Bagdad and the remainder at Cairo.
I do not propose to occupy space by transcribing the accounts in detail, but
one extract may be offered as a sample of the rest—“Eclipse of the Sun
observed at Bagdad, August 18, 928 A.D. The Sun rose about one-fourth
eclipsed. We looked at the Sun on a surface of water and saw it distinctly.
At the end when we found no part of the Sun was any longer eclipsed, and
that its disc appeared in the water as a complete circle, its altitude was 12°
in the E., less the one-third of a division of the instrument, which itself was
divided to thirds of a degree. One must therefore reduce the stated altitude

by one-ninth of a degree, leaving, therefore, the true altitude as
11° 53′ 20″.” The skill and care shown in this record shows that the Arab
who observed this eclipse nearly a thousand years ago must have been a
man of a different type from an ordinary resident at Bagdad in the year
1899. No description is given of the instrument used, but presumably it was
some kind of a quadrant. It does not appear why some of the observations
were made at Bagdad and some at Cairo. The Bagdad observations
commence with an eclipse of the Sun on November 30, 829, and end with
an eclipse of the Moon on November 5, 933. The Cairo observations begin
with an eclipse of the Sun on December 12, 977, and end with an eclipse of
the Sun on January 24, 1004. These statements apply to the 25 observations
which Newcomb considered were trustworthy enough to be employed in his
researches, but he rejected three as imperfect.
I have broken away from the strict thread of chronological sequence in
order to keep together the notes respecting Arabian observations of eclipses.
Let us now revert to the European eclipses.
Under the date of A.D. 733, the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle tells us that, “In
this year Æthelbald captured Somerton; and the Sun was eclipsed, and all
the Sun’s disc was like a black shield; and Acca was driven from his
bishopric.” Johnston suggests that the reference is to an annular eclipse
which he finds occurred on August 14, at about 8¼ h. in the morning. In
Schnurrer’s Chronik der Seuchen (pt. i., § 113, p. 164), it is stated that,
“One year after the Arabs had been driven back across the Pyrenees after
the battle of Tours, the Sun was so much darkened on the 19th of August as
to excite universal terror.” It may be that the English eclipse is here referred
to, and a date wrong by five days assigned to it by Schnurrer. Humboldt
(Cosmos, vol. iv. p. 384, Bohn’s ed.) reports this eclipse in an enumeration
he gives of instances of the Sun having been darkened.
On May 5, A.D. 840, there happened an eclipse of the Sun which, amongst
other effects, is said to have so greatly frightened Louis Le Debonnaire
(Charlemagne’s son) that it contributed to his death. The Emperor was taken
ill at Worms, and having been removed to Ingelheim, an island in the Rhine,
near Mayence, died there on June 20. Hind[75] found that this was a total
eclipse, and that the northern limit of totality passed about 100 miles south
of Worms. The middle of the eclipse occurred at 1h. 15m. p.m. with the Sun

at an altitude of 57°. The duration of the eclipse was unusually long, namely
about 5½ minutes. With the Sun so high and the obscuration lasting so long,
this eclipse must have been an unusually imposing one, and well calculated
to inspire special alarm.
On Oct. 29, 878, in the reign of King Alfred, there was a total eclipse
visible at London. The mention of it in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle is as
follows:—“The Sun was eclipsed at 1 hour of the day.” No month is given,
and the year is said to have been 879, which is undoubtedly wrong. Hind
found that the central line of the eclipse passed about 20 miles N. of
London, and that the totality lasted 1m. 51s. Tycho Brahe in his Historia
Cœlestis quotes from the Annales Fuldenses a statement that the Sun was so
much darkened after the 9th hour that the stars appeared in the heavens.
Thorpe in his edition of the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle quotes from Mr.
Richard Price a note which assigns the date of March 14, 880, to this
eclipse, and cites in confirmation a passage from the Chronicle of Florence
of Worcester, anno 879. The 880 eclipse is mentioned by Asser in his De
Vitâ et Rebus gestis Alfredi in the words following:—“In the same year
[879] an eclipse of the Sun took place between three o’clock and the
evening, but nearer three o’clock.” The confusion of dates is remarkable.
In the Chronicon Scotorum, under the date of 885, we find:—“An eclipse
of the Sun; and stars were seen in the heavens.” The reference appears to be
to the total eclipse of June 16, A.D. 885. The totality lasted more than four
minutes, and as the stars are said to have been visible in the North of
Ireland, doubtless that part of Ireland came within the eclipse limits.
On Dec. 22, 968, there was an eclipse of the Sun, which was almost total
at London at about 8h. 33m. a.m., or soon after sunrise. The central line
passed across the S.-W. of England, and thence through France to the
Mediterranean. One Leon, a deacon at Corfu, observed this eclipse, and has
left behind what probably is the first perfectly explicit mention of the
Corona.[76]
On Aug. 30, 1030, there happened an eclipse visible in Norway, which
has already been alluded to on a previous page under the name of the
“eclipse of Stiklastad.” This was one of those eclipses, the circumstances of
which were examined many years ago in detail by Sir G. B. Airy,[77]

because he thought that information of value might be obtained therefrom
with respect to the motions of the Moon. Its availability for that purpose
has, however, been seriously questioned by Professor Newcomb. Stiklastad
is a place where a battle was fought, at which Olav, King of Norway, is said
to have been killed. While the battle was in progress the Sun was totally
eclipsed, and a red light appeared around it. This is regarded as an early
record of the Corona, though not the first.[78] Johnston found that the
eclipse was nearly total at about 2h. 21m. p.m.
In 1033 there happened on June 29 an eclipse of the Sun, which evidently
had many observers, because it is mentioned by many contemporary
writers. For instance, the French historian, Glaber,[79] says that “on the 3rd
of the Calends of July there was an eclipse from the sixth to the eighth hour
of the day exceedingly terrible. For the Sun became of a sapphire colour; in
its upper part having the likeness of a fourth part of the Moon.” This
sufficiently harmonises with Johnston’s calculations that about four-fifths of
the Sun on the lower side was covered at 10h. 50m. in the morning.

Footnotes:
[61] Hist. Rome, Book lv., chap. 22.
[62] Letter in the Times, July 19, 1872.
[63] Hist. Rome, Book lx., chap. 26.
[64] Life of Apollonius of Tyana, Book viii., c. 23.
[65] Plut. Opera Mor. et Phil., vol. xix. p. 682 Ed. Lipsiæ, 1778.
[66] Ast. Nach, No. 1838, vol. lxxvii. p. 223: March 31, 1871.
[67] Matheseos, Lib. i., cap. 2, p. 5, Basileæ. 1533.
[68] Historiæ, Lib. xx., cap. 3, sec. 1.
[69] Epitome Historiæ Ecclesiasticæ, Lib. xii., cap. 8.
[70] Historia Francorum, Lib. ii., cap. 3 (ad fin.).
[71] Mrs. D. P. Todd, Total Eclipses of the Sun, p. 101.
[72] The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, vol. ii. p. 14. Ed. B. Thorpe, 1861.
[73] Prof. S. Ockley, History of the Saracens, vol ii. p. 110. Camb. 1757.

[74] It should be stated that prior to the publication of the work in a book form
the greater part of the eclipse observations had been published in the Mémoires
de l’Institut National des Sciences et Arts: Sciences Mathématiques et
Physiques, tome ii.
[75] Letter in the Times, July 19, 1872.
[76] J. F. J. Schmidt, Ast. Nach., vol. lxxvii. p. 127, Feb. 1, 1871.
[77] Memoirs, R.A.S., vol. xxvi. p. 131, 1858.
[78] J. L. E. Dreyer, Nature, vol. xvi. p. 549, Oct. 25, 1877.

CHAPTER XII.
ECLIPSES OF THE SUN MENTIONED IN HISTORY.—MEDIÆVAL
AND MODERN.

One of the most celebrated eclipses of mediæval times was that of August
2, 1133, visible as a total eclipse in Scotland. It was considered a presage of
misfortune to Henry I. and was thus referred to by William of
Malmesbury[80]:—
“The elements manifested their sorrow at this great man’s last departure
from England. For the Sun on that day at the 6th hour shrouded his glorious
face, as the poets say, in hideous darkness agitating the hearts of men by an
eclipse; and on the 6th day of the week early in the morning there was so
great an earthquake that the ground appeared absolutely to sink down; an
horrid noise being first heard beneath the surface.”
This eclipse is also alluded to in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle though the
year is wrongly given as 1135 instead of 1133 as it certainly was. The
Chronicle says:—“In this year King Henry went over sea at Lammas, and
the second day as he lay and slept on the ship the day darkened over all
lands; and the Sun became as it were a three-night-old Moon, and the stars
about it at mid-day. Men were greatly wonder-stricken and affrighted, and
said that a great thing should come hereafter. So it did, for the same year the
king died on the following day after St. Andrew’s Mass day, Dec. 2, in
Normandy.” The king did die in 1135, but there was no eclipse of the
August new Moon, and without doubt the writer has muddled up the year of
the eclipse and of the king’s departure from England (to which he never
returned) and the year of his death. Calvisius states that this eclipse was
observed in Flanders and that the stars appeared.

Respecting the above-mentioned discrepancy Mrs. Todd aptly remarks:
—“So Henry must have died in 1133, which he did not; or else there must
have been an eclipse in 1135, which there was not. But this is not the only
labyrinth into which chronology and old eclipses, imagination, and
computation, lead the unwary searcher.” Professor Freeman’s explanation
fairly clears up the difficulty:—“The fact that he never came back to
England, together with the circumstances of his voyage, seems to have
made a deep impression on men’s minds. In popular belief the signs and
wonders which marked his last voyage were transferred to the Lammas-tide
before his death two years later.”[81] The central line of this eclipse
traversed Scotland from Ross to Forfar and the eclipse was of course large
in every part of the country. The totality lasted 4m. 20s. in Forfarshire.
Hind has furnished some further information respecting this eclipse. It
appears that during the existence of the Kingdom of Jerusalem created by
the Crusaders an eclipse occurred which would appear to have been total at
Jerusalem or in its immediate neighbourhood. No date is given and a date
can only be guessed, and Hind guessed that the eclipse of 1133 was the one
referred to. He found that after leaving Scotland and crossing Europe the
central line of the 1133 eclipse entered Palestine near Jaffa and passed over
Jerusalem where the Sun was hidden for 4¼ minutes at about 3h. p.m. From
Nablous on the N. to Ascalon on the S. the country was in darkness for
nearly the same period of time. The alternative eclipses to this one would be
those of Sept. 4, 1187, magnitude at Jerusalem 9⁄10ths of the Sun’s diameter;
or June 23, 1191, magnitude at the same place about 7⁄10ths; but these do not
seem to harmonise so well with the accounts handed down to us as does the
eclipse of 1133.
In 1140, on March 20, there happened a total eclipse of the Sun visible in
England which is thus referred to by William of Malmesbury[82]:—“During
this year, in Lent, on the 13th of the Calends of April, at the 9th hour of the
4th day of the week, there was an eclipse, throughout England, as I have
heard. With us, indeed, and with all our neighbours, the obscuration of the
Sun also was so remarkable, that persons sitting at table, as it then happened
almost everywhere, for it was Lent, at first feared that Chaos was come
again: afterwards, learning the cause, they went out and beheld the stars
around the Sun. It was thought and said by many, not untruly, that the King
[Stephen] would not continue a year in the government.”

The same eclipse is also thus mentioned in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle:
—“Afterwards in Lent the Sun and the day darkened about the noontide of
the day, when men were eating, and they lighted candles to eat by; and that
was the 13th of the Calends of April, March 20. Men were greatly wonder-
stricken.” The greatest obscuration at London took place at 2h. 36m. p.m.,
but it is not quite clear whether the line of totality did actually pass over
London.
It was long supposed that this eclipse was total at London, an idea which
seems to have arisen from Halley having told the Royal Society anent the
total eclipse of May 3, 1715, that he could not find that any total eclipse had
been visible at London since March 20, 1140. In consequence of this
statement of Halley’s, Hind carefully investigated the circumstances of this
eclipse, and found that it had not been total at London. The central line
entered our island at Aberystwith, and passing near Shrewsbury, Stafford,
Derby, Nottingham, and Lincoln, reached the German Ocean, 10 miles S. of
Saltfleet. The southern limit of the zone of totality passed through the South
Midland counties, and the nearest point of approach to London was a point
on the borders of Northamptonshire and Bedfordshire. For a position on the
central line near Stafford, Hind found that the totality began at 2h. 36m.
p.m. local mean time, the duration being 3m. 26s., and the Sun’s altitude
being more than 30°. The stars seen were probably the planets Mercury and
Venus, then within a degree of each other, and 10° W. of the Sun, and
perhaps the stars forming the well-known “Square of Pegasus.” Mars and
Saturn were also, at that time, within a degree of each other, but very near
the western horizon. It is therefore necessary to look further back than 1140
to find a total solar eclipse visible in London.[83]
A solar eclipse seems to have been alluded to by certain historians as
having happened in A.D. 1153. We have the obscure statement that
“something singular happened to the Sun the day after the Conversion of St.
Paul.” A somewhat large eclipse having been visible at Augsburg in
Germany, on January 26, this may have been the “something” referred to. It
would seem that about 11⁄12ths of the Sun’s diameter was covered.
On May 14, A.D. 1230, there happened a great eclipse of the Sun, thus
described by Roger of Wendover[84]:—“On the 14th of May, which was the
Tuesday in Rogation Week, an unusual eclipse of the Sun took place very

early in the morning, immediately after sunrise; and it became so dark that
the labourers, who had commenced their morning’s work, were obliged to
leave it, and returned again to their beds to sleep; but in about an hour’s
time, to the astonishment of many, the Sun regained its usual brightness.”
This eclipse, as regards its total phase, is said by Johnston to have begun in
the horizon, a little to the N. of London, in the early morning.
On June 3, A.D. 1239, and October 6, 1241, there occurred total eclipses
of the Sun, which have been very carefully discussed by Professor Celoria
of Milan, with the view of using them in investigations into the Moon’s
mean motion.[85] The second of these eclipses is mentioned by Tycho
Brahe.[86] He states that “a few stars appeared about noonday, and the Sun
was hidden from sight in a clear sky.” The eclipse was total in Eastern
Europe.
Dr. Lingard,[87] the well-known Roman Catholic historian, speaking of
the battle of Cressy, which was fought on August 26, 1346, says:—“Never,
perhaps, were preparations for battle made under circumstances so truly
awful. On that very day the Sun suffered a partial eclipse: birds in clouds,
precursors of a storm, flew screaming over the two armies; and the rain fell
in torrents, accompanied with incessant thunder and lightning. About 5 in
the afternoon, the weather cleared up, the Sun in full splendour darted his
rays in the eyes of the enemy; and the Genoese, setting up their shouts,
discharged their quarrels.” This was not an eclipse, for none was due to take
place; and the phenomenon could only have been meteorological—dense
clouds or something of that sort in the sky.
On June 16, 1406, there was a large eclipse of the Sun, 9⁄10ths of its
diameter being covered at London; but on the Continent it seems to have
been total. It is stated that the darkness was such that people could hardly
recognise one another.
One of the most celebrated eclipses during the Middle Ages was
undoubtedly that of June 17, 1433. This was long remembered in Scotland
as the “Black Hour,” and its circumstances were fully investigated some
years ago by Hind. It was a remarkable eclipse in that the Moon was within
13° of perigee and the Sun only 2° from apogee. The central line traversed
Scotland in a south-easterly direction from Ross to Forfar, passing near

Inverness and Dundee. Maclaurin[88] who lived in the early part of the last
century mentions that in his time a manuscript account of this eclipse was
preserved in the library of the University of Edinburgh wherein the
darkness is said to have come on at about 3 p.m., and to have been very
profound. The duration of the totality at Inverness was 4m. 32s.; at
Edinburgh 3m. 41s. The central line passed from Britain to the N. of
Frankfort-on-the-Maine, through Bavaria, to the Dardanelles, to the S. of
Aleppo and thence nearly parallel to the river Euphrates to the N.-E. border
of Arabia. In Turkey, according to Calvisius, “near evening the light of the
Sun was so overpowered that darkness covered the land.”
In 1544, on Jan. 24, there occurred an eclipse of the Sun which was
nearly but not quite total. The chief interest arises from the fact that it was
one of the first observed by professed astronomers: Gemma Frisius saw it at
Louvain.
Kepler says[89] that the day became dark like the twilight of evening and
that the birds which from the break of day had been singing became mute.
The middle of the eclipse was at about 9 a.m.
In 1560 an eclipse of the Sun took place which was total in Spain and
Portugal. Clavius who observed it at Coimbra says[90] that “the Sun
remained obscured for no little time: there was darkness greater than that of
night, no one could see where he trod and the stars shone very brightly in
the sky: the birds moreover, wonderful to say, fell down to the ground in
fright at such startling darkness.” Kepler is responsible for the statement
that Tycho Brahe did not believe this, and wrote to Clavius to that effect 40
years afterwards.
In 1567 there was an annular eclipse visible at Rome on April 9. Clavius
says[91] that “the whole Sun was not eclipsed but that there was left a bright
circle all round.” This in set terms is a description of an annular eclipse, but
Johnston who calculated that at Rome the greatest obscuration took place at
20m. past noon points out that the augmentation of the Moon’s semi-
diameter would almost have produced totality. Tycho tells us that he saw
this eclipse on the shores of the Baltic when a young man about 20 years of
age.

The total eclipse of February 25, 1598, long left a special mark on the
memories of the people of Scotland. The day was spoken of as “Black
Saturday.” Maclaurin states[92]:—“There is a tradition that some persons in
the North lost their way in the time of this eclipse, and perished in the
snow”—a statement which Hind discredits. The central line passed from
near Stranraer, over Dalkeith, and therefore Edinburgh was within the zone
of totality. Totality came on at Edinburgh at 10h. 15m. and lasted 1m. 30s.
From the rapid motion of the Moon in declination, the course of the central
line was a quickly ascending one in latitude on the Earth’s surface, the
totality passing off within the Arctic circle.
Kepler in his account of the new star in the constellation Ophiuchus[93]
refers to the total eclipse of the Sun of October 12, 1605, as having been
observed at Naples, and that the “Red Flames” were visible as a rim of red
light round the Sun’s disc: at least this seems to be the construction which
may fairly be put upon the Latin of the original description.
The partial eclipse of the Sun of May 30, 1612, is recorded to have been
seen “through a tube.” No doubt this is an allusion to the newly-invented
instrument which we now call the telescope. Seemingly this is the first
eclipse of the Sun so observed, but it is on record that an eclipse of the
Moon had been previously observed through a telescope. This was the lunar
eclipse of July 6, 1610, though the observer’s name has not been handed
down to us.
The eclipse of April 8, 1652, is another of those Scotch eclipses, as we
may call them, which left their mark on the people of that country.
Maclaurin[94] speaks of it in his time (he died in 1746) as one of the two
central eclipses which are “still famous among the populace in this country”
[Scotland], and “known amongst them by the appellation of Mirk Monday.”
The central line passed over the S.E. of Ireland, near Wexford and Wicklow,
and reaching Scotland near Burrow Head in Wigtownshire, and passing not
far from Edinburgh, Montrose and Aberdeen, quitted Scotland at Peterhead.
Greenock and Elgin were near the northern limit of the zone of totality, and
the Cheviots and Berwick upon the southern limit. The eclipse was
observed at Carrickfergus by Dr. Wyberd.[95] Hind found that its duration
there was but 44s. This short duration, he suggested, may partly explain the
curious remark of Dr. Wyberd that when the Sun was reduced to “a very

slender crescent of light, the Moon all at once threw herself within the
margin of the solar disc with such agility that she seemed to revolve like an
upper millstone, affording a pleasant spectacle of rotatory motion.”
Wyberd’s further description clearly applies to the Corona. A Scotch
account says that “the country people tilling, loosed their ploughs. The birds
dropped to the ground.”
The eclipse of November 4, 1668, visible as a partial one in England, was
of no particular interest in itself but deserves notice as having been
observed by Flamsteed,[96] who gives a few diagrams of his observations at
Derby. He states that the eclipse came on much earlier than had been
predicted. It was well known at this time that the tables of the Sun and
Moon then in use were very defective, and it was a recognition of this fact
which eventually led to the foundation of the Greenwich Observatory in
1675.
On September 23, 1699, an eclipse of the Sun occurred which was total
to the N. of Caithness for the very brief space of 10-15 secs. At Edinburgh,
about 11⁄12ths of the Sun’s diameter was obscured. In the Appendix to
Pepys’s Diary[97] there is a letter from Dr. Wallis mentioning that his
daughter’s attention was called to it by noticing “the light of the Sun look
somewhat dim” at about 9 a.m., whilst she was writing a letter, she knowing
nothing of the eclipse.
An eclipse of the Sun occurred on May 12, 1706, which was visible as a
partial eclipse in England and was total on the Continent, especially in
Switzerland. A certain Captain Stannyan who made observations at Berne,
writes thus to Flamsteed[98]:—“That the Sun was totally darkened there for
four and a half minutes of time; that a fixed star and a planet appeared very
bright; and that his getting out of his eclipse was preceded by a blood-red
streak of light from its left limb, which continued not longer than six or
seven seconds of time; then part of the Sun’s disc appeared all of a sudden
as bright as Venus was ever seen in the night; nay, brighter; and in that very
instant gave a light and shadow to things as strong as the Moon uses to do.”
On this communication Flamsteed remarks:—“The Captain is the first
man I ever heard of that took notice of a red streak preceding the emersion
of the Sun’s body from a total eclipse, and I take notice of it to you [the

Royal Society], because it infers that the Moon has an atmosphere; and its
short continuance, if only six or seven seconds’ time, tells us that its height
was not more than five or six hundredths part of her diameter.”
On the whole, perhaps, the most celebrated eclipse of the Sun ever
recorded in England was that of May 3, 1715. The line of totality passed
right across England from Cornwall to Norfolk, and the phenomenon was
carefully observed and described by the most experienced astronomer of the
time, Dr. Edmund Halley. The line of totality passed over London amongst
other places, and as the maximum phase took place soon after 9 a.m. on a
fine spring morning, the inhabitants of the Metropolis saw a sight which
their successors will not see again till many generations have come and
gone. Halley has left behind him an exceedingly interesting account of this
event, some allusions to which have already been made.
He seems to have seen what we call the Corona, described by him
however as a “luminous ring,” “of a pale whiteness, or rather pearl colour, a
little tinged with the colours of the Iris, and concentric with the Moon.” He
speaks also of a dusky but strong red light which seemed to colour the dark
edge of the Moon just before the Sun emerged from totality. Jupiter,
Mercury, Venus, and the stars Capella and Aldebaran were seen in London,
whilst N. of London, more directly under the central line, as many as
twenty stars were seen.
The inhabitants of England who lived in the reign of George I. were
singularly fortunate in their chances of seeing total eclipses of the Sun, for
only nine years after[99] the one just described, namely, on May 22, 1724,
another total eclipse occurred. The central line crossed some of the southern
countries, and the phenomenon was well seen and reported on by Dr.
Stukeley,[100] who stationed himself on Haraden Hill, near Salisbury. The
Doctor says of the darkness that he seemed to “feel it, as it were, drop upon
us ... like a great dark mantle,” and that during the totality the spectacle
presented to his view “was beyond all that he had ever seen or could picture
to his imagination the most solemn.” He could with difficulty discern the
faces of his companions which had a ghastly startling appearance. When the
totality was ending there appeared a small lucid spot, and from it ran a rim
of faint brightness. In about 3½ minutes from this appearance the hill-tops

changed from black to blue, the horizon gave out the grey streaks previous
to morning dawn, and the birds sprang joyously into the air.
This eclipse seems to have had royal observers. It was watched at
Kensington apparently by the King or some of the royal family of England,
and at Trianon (Paris) by the King of France,[101] under the competent
guidance of Maraldi, Cassini and De Louville. It was the last which was
visible as a total one in any part of England.
On May 2, 1733, there was an eclipse of the Sun, which was total in
Sweden and partial in England. In Sweden the total obscuration lasted more
than 3 minutes. Jupiter, the stars in Ursa Major, Capella, and several other
stars were visible to the naked eye, as also was a luminous ring round the
Sun. Three or four spots of reddish colour were also perceived near the limb
of the Moon, but not in immediate contact with it. These so-called red
“spots” were doubtless the Red Flames of the present century, and the
luminous ring the Corona.
On March 1, 1737, a good annular eclipse was observed at Edinburgh by
Maclaurin.[102] In his account he says:—“A little before the annulus was
complete a remarkable point or speck of pale light appeared near the middle
of the part of the Moon’s circumference that was not yet come upon the disc
of the Sun.... During the appearance of the annulus the direct light of the
Sun was still very considerable, but the places that were shaded from his
light appeared gloomy. There was a dusk in the atmosphere, especially
towards the N. and E. In those chambers which had not their lights
westwards the obscurity was considerable. Venus appeared plainly, and
continued visible long after the annulus was dissolved, and I am told that
other stars were seen by some.” Lord Aberdour mentions a narrow streak of
dusky red light on the dark edge of the Moon immediately before the ring
was completed, and after it was dissolved. No doubt this is a record of the
“Red Flames.”
In 1748 Scotland was again favoured with a central eclipse, but it was
only annular. The Earl of Morton[103] and James Short, the optician, who
observed the phenomenon at Aberdour Castle, 10 miles N.-W. of
Edinburgh, just outside the line of annularity, saw a brown coloured light

stretching along the circumference of the Moon from each of the cusps. A
“star” (probably the planet Venus) was seen to the E. of the Sun.
The annular eclipse of April 1, 1764, visible as such in North Kent, was
the subject of the following quaint letter by the Rev. Dr. Stukeley:—

“To the Printer of Whitehall Evening Post,—

“In regard to the approaching solar eclipse of Sunday, April 1,
I think it advisable to remark that, it happening in the time of
divine service, it is desired you would insert this caution in your
public paper. The eclipse begins soon after 9, the middle a little
before 11, the end a little after 12. There will be no total
darkness in the very middle, observable in this metropolis, but
as people’s curiositys will not be over with the middle of the
eclipse, if the church service be ordered to begin a little before
12, it will properly be morning prayer, and an uniformity
preserved in our duty to the Supreme Being, the author of these
amazing celestial movements,—
Yours,
Rector of St. Geo., Q.S.”[104]
The year 1766 furnishes the somewhat rare case of a total eclipse of the
Sun observed on board ship on the high seas. The observers were officers of
the French man-of-war the Comte d’Artois. Though the total obscuration
lasted only 53 secs., there was seen a luminous ring about the Moon which
had four remarkable expansions, situate at a distance of 90° from each
other.[105] These expansions are doubtless those rays which we now speak
of as “streamers” from the Corona.
Curiously enough the next important total eclipse deserving of notice was
also observed at sea. This was the eclipse of June 24, 1778. The observer
was the Spanish Admiral, Don Antonio Ulloa, who was passing from the
Azores to Cape St. Vincent. The total obscuration lasted 4 minutes. The
luminous ring presented a very beautiful appearance: out of it there issued
forth rays of light which reached to the distance of a diameter of the Moon.
Before it became very conspicuous stars of the 1st and 2nd magnitudes
were distinctly visible, but when it attained its greatest brilliancy, only stars
of the 1st magnitude could be perceived. “The darkness was such that
persons who were asleep and happened to wake, thought that they had slept
the whole evening and only waked when the night was pretty far advanced.
The fowls, birds, and other animals on board took their usual position for
sleeping, as if it had been night.”[106]

On Sept. 5, 1793, there happened an eclipse which, annular to the N. of
Scotland, was seen and observed in England by Sir W. Herschel[107] as a
partial eclipse. He made some important observations on the Moon on this
occasion measuring the height of several of the lunar mountains.
Considerations respecting the shape of one of the Moon’s horns led him to
form an opinion adverse to the idea that there the Moon had an atmosphere.

Footnotes:
[79] Historiarum Sui Temporis, Lib. iv., cap. 9.
[80] Historia Novella, Lib. i., sec. 8.
[81] Norman Conquest, vol. v. p. 239.
[82] Historia Novella, Lib. ii., sec. 35.
[83] Letter in the Times, July 28, 1871.
[84] Rogerus de Wendover, Flores Historiarum, vol. ii. p. 535, Bohn’s ed.
[85] Sugli Eclissi Solari Totali del 3 Giugno 1239, e del 6 Ottobre 1241 in the
Memorie del R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Littere, vol. xiii. p. 275.
[86] Historia Cœlestis, vol. i. p. 38.
[87] Hist. Engl., vol. iii. chap. xviii. p. 50, 4to. ed.
[88] Phil. Trans., vol. xl. p. 194, 1737.
[89] Astronomiæ Pars Optica, c. viii. sec. 3; Opera Omnia, vol. ii. p. 315. Ed.
Frisch, 1859.
[90] Quoted by Kepler, as above, at p. 315.
[91] Commentarius in Sacroboscum, cap. iv.; quoted in Kepler’s Astronomiæ
Pars Optica, c. viii. sec. 3; Opera Omnia, vol ii. p. 316. Ed. Frisch, 1859.
[92] Phil. Trans., vol. xl. p. 193; 1737.
[93] De Stellâ Novâ in Pede Serpentarii, p. 115; Pragæ, 1606.
[94] Phil. Trans., vol. xl. p. 193; 1737.
[95] V. Wing, Astronomia Britannica, p. 355.
[96] Historia Cœlestis, vol. i. pp. 7 and 21.
[97] Diary of Samuel Pepys, vol. vi. p. 208; Ed. M. Bright, 1879.
[98] Phil. Trans., vol. xxv. p. 2240; 1706.

[99] Being half a Saros period (see p. 20, ante).
[100] Itinerarium Curiosum, 2nd ed., vol. i. p. 180.
[101] Mem. de Mathématique et de Physique de l’Acad. des Sciences, 1724, p.
259.
[102] Phil. Trans., vol. xl. pp. 181, 184. 1737.
[103] Phil. Trans., vol. xlv. p. 586. 1750. This is the man who under the
designation of “Lord Aberdour” observed the eclipse of 1737 (ante).
[104] Rev. W. Stukeley, Rector of St. George’s, Queen’s Square, London, Diary,
vol. xx. p. 44, ed. “Surtees Soc.,” vol. lxxvi. p. 384.
[105] Le Gentil, Voyage dans les Mers de l’Inde, vol. ii. p. 16. Paris, 1769.
[106] Phil. Trans., vol. lxix. p. 105. 1779.
[107] Phil. Trans., vol. lxxxiv. p. 39. 1794.

CHAPTER XIII.
ECLIPSES OF THE SUN DURING THE NINETEENTH CENTURY.

Observations of total solar eclipses during the 19th century have been, for
the most part, carried on under circumstances so essentially different from
everything that has gone before, that not only does a new chapter seem
desirable but also new form of treatment. Up to the beginning of the 18th
century the observations (even the best of them) may be said to have been
made and recorded with but few exceptions by unskilled observers with no
clear ideas as to what they should look for and what they might expect to
see. Things improved a little during the 18th century and the observations
by Halley, Maclaurin, Bradley, Don Antonio Ulloa, Sir W. Herschel, and
others in particular rose to a much higher standard than any which had
preceded them. However, it has only been during the 19th century, and
especially during the latter half of it, that total eclipses of the Sun have been
observed under circumstances calculated to extract from them large and
solid extensions of scientific knowledge. Inasmuch as it has been deemed
convenient to sort out and classify our knowledge under particular heads in
previous chapters, I shall in this chapter speak only of the leading facts of
each eclipse in such an outline form as will avoid as far as possible
unnecessary repetition.
In 1806 a total eclipse of the Sun occurred, visible in N. America.
Observations made in the United States have been handed down to us. Don
Joachin Ferrer, a Spanish astronomer, observed the eclipse at Kinderhook in
the State of New York. The totality lasted more than 4½ m.—a somewhat
unusual length of time. One or two planets and a few 1st magnitude stars
were seen. During the totality there was a slight fall of dew.

On Nov. 19, 1816, there occurred the first total eclipse of the Sun in the
19th century, the central line of which passed over Europe. There is only
one known observation of the total phase, and this was by Hagen at Culm in
Bohemia, but he appears to have seen only the beginning of the totality and
not the whole of it.
A partial eclipse of the Sun visible as such in England but which was
annular in the Shetland Isles took place on Sept. 7, 1820. The only reason
why this is worth mention is for its political associations. The trial of Queen
Caroline was going on in the House of Lords, and the House suspended its
sitting for a short time for the sake of the eclipse.
On May 15, 1836, there occurred an annular eclipse of the Sun, which
though it was nowhere total, may be looked upon as the first of the modern
eclipses the observations of which have taken such a great development
during recent years. The annularity of this eclipse was observed in the N. of
England and in the S. of Scotland; and it was at Jedburgh in Roxburghshire
that Mr. Francis Baily[108] observed that feature of eclipses of the Sun now
universally known as “Baily’s Beads.” Some indications of the Red Flames
were also obtained at places where the eclipse was annular.
Probably it was the recognition of Baily’s Beads as a regular concomitant
of eclipses of the Sun, which helped to pave the way for the extensive
preparations made in France, Italy, Austria, and Russia for observing the
total eclipse of July 8, 1842. Many of the most eminent astronomers of
Europe repaired to different stations on the central line in order to see the
phenomenon. Amongst these may be named Arago, Valz, Airy, Carlini,
Santini, and O. Struve. The eclipse was witnessed under favourable
circumstances at all the various stations on the central line across Europe,
from Perpignan in France in the West to Lipesk in Russia in the East.
Arago wrote[109] such an exceedingly graphic account of this eclipse
from what may be termed the standpoint of the general public, that I will
quote it at some length, because, with an alteration of date, it might be re-
written and applied to every total eclipse visible in much populated tracts of
country.
“At Perpignan persons who were seriously unwell alone remained within
doors. As soon as day began to break the population covered the terraces

and battlements of the town, as well as all the little eminences in the
neighbourhood, in hopes of obtaining a view of the Sun as he ascended
above the horizon. At the citadel we had under our eyes, besides numerous
groups of citizens established on the slopes, a body of soldiers about to be
reviewed.
“The hour of the commencement of the eclipse drew nigh. More than
twenty thousand persons, with smoked glasses in their hands, were
examining the radiant globe projected upon an azure sky. Although armed
with our powerful telescopes, we had hardly begun to discern the small
notch on the western limb of the Sun, when an immense exclamation,
formed by the blending together of twenty thousand different voices,
announced to us that we had anticipated by only a few seconds the
observation made with the unaided eye by twenty thousand astronomers
equipped for the occasion, whose first essay this was. A lively curiosity, a
spirit of emulation, the desire of not being outdone, had the privilege of
giving to the natural vision an unusual power of penetration. During the
interval that elapsed between this moment and the almost total
disappearance of the Sun we remarked nothing worthy of relation in the
countenances of so many spectators. But when the Sun, reduced to a very
narrow filament, began to throw upon the horizon only a very feeble light, a
sort of uneasiness seized upon all; every person felt a desire to
communicate his impressions to those around him. Hence arose a deep
murmur, resembling that sent forth by the distant ocean after a tempest. The
hum of voices increased in intensity as the solar crescent grew more
slender; at length the crescent disappeared, darkness suddenly succeeded
light, and an absolute silence marked this phase of the eclipse with as great
precision as did the pendulum of our astronomical clock. The phenomenon
in its magnificence had triumphed over the petulance of youth, over the
levity which certain persons assume as a sign of superiority, over the noisy
indifference of which soldiers usually make profession. A profound stillness
also reigned in the air; the birds had ceased to sing. After an interval of
solemn expectation, which lasted about two minutes, transports of joy,
shouts of enthusiastic applause, saluted with the same accord, the same
spontaneous feeling, the first reappearance of the rays of the Sun. To a
condition of melancholy produced by sentiments of an indefinable nature
there succeeded a lively and intelligible feeling of satisfaction which no one

sought to escape from or moderate the impulses of. To the majority of the
public the phenomenon had arrived at its term. The other phases of the
eclipse had few attentive spectators beyond the persons devoted especially
to astronomical pursuits.”
The total eclipse of July 28, 1851, may be said to have been the first
which was the subject of an “Eclipse Expedition,” a phrase which of late
years has become exceedingly familiar. The total phase was visible in
Norway and Sweden, and great numbers of astronomers from all parts of
Europe flocked to those countries. Amongst those who went from England
were Sir G. B. Airy, the Astronomer Royal (then Mr. Airy), Mr. J. R. Hind
and Mr. Lassell. The Red Flames were very much in evidence, and the fact
that they belonged to the Sun and not to the Moon was clearly established.
Hind mentions that “the aspect of Nature during the total eclipse was grand
beyond description.” This feature is dwelt upon with more than usual
emphasis in many of the published accounts. I have never seen it suggested
that the mountainous character of the country may have had something to
do with it, but that idea would seem not improbable.
In the year 1858, two central eclipses of the Sun occurred, both
presenting some features of interest. That of March 15 was annular, the
central line passing across England from Lyme Regis in Dorsetshire to the
Wash, traversing portions of Somersetshire, Wiltshire, Berkshire,
Oxfordshire, Northamptonshire, Lincolnshire, and Norfolk. The weather
generally was unfavourable and the annular phase was only observed at a
few places, but important meteorological observations were made and
yielded results, as regards the diminution of temperature, which were very
definite. All over the country rooks and pigeons were seen returning home
during the greatest obscuration; starlings in many places took flight; at
Oxford a thrush commenced its evening song; at Ventnor a fish in an
aquarium, ordinarily visible in the evening only, was in full activity about
the time of greatest gloom; and generally, it was noted that the birds
stopped singing and flew low from bush to bush. The darkness, though
nowhere intense, was everywhere very appreciable and decided. The second
central eclipse of 1858 took place on September 7 and was observed in Peru
by Lieutenant Gilliss of the U.S. Navy. The totality only lasted one minute,
and the general features of a total eclipse do not appear to have been very
conspicuously visible. Gilliss remarks[110]:—“Two citizens of Olmos stood

within a few feet of me, watching in silence, and with anxious
countenances, the rapid and fearful decrease of light. They were wholly
ignorant that any sudden effect would follow the total obscuration of the
Sun. At that instant one exclaimed in terror “La Gloria,” and both, I believe,
fell to their knees, filled with awe. They appreciated the resemblance of the
Corona to the halos with which the old masters have encircled their ideals
of the heads of our Saviour and the Madonna, and devoutly regarded this as
a manifestation of the Divine Presence.”
The year 1860 saw the departure from England of the first great Ship
Expedition to see an eclipse. One was due to happen on July 18, and a large
party went out from England to Spain in H.M.S. Himalaya. Mr. De La Rue
took a very well-equipped photographic detachment, and his photographs
were eminently successful. This eclipse settled for ever the doubt as to
whether the Red Flames belonged to the Sun or the Moon, and in favour of
the former view.
The years 1868, 1869, and 1870 were each marked by total eclipses,
which were observed to a greater or less extent. In the first-named year the
eclipse occurred on August 18, the central line passing across India. The
weather was not everywhere favourable, but several expeditions were
dispatched to the East Indies. The spectroscope was largely brought into
play with the immediate result of showing that the Corona was to be
deemed a sort of atmosphere of the Sun, not self-luminous, but shining by
reflected light. The eclipse of 1869 was observed by several well-equipped
parties in the United States, and a very complete series of excellent
photographs was obtained.
To view the eclipse of December 22, 1870, several expeditions were
dispatched, the central line passing over some very accessible places in
Spain, Sicily, and North Africa. The English observers went chiefly in
H.M.S. Urgent, though some of them travelled overland to Sicily. The
expenses, both of the sea and land parties, were to a large extent defrayed
by Her Majesty’s Government. It deserves to be noted that so great was the
anxiety of the French astronomer Janssen to see this eclipse, that he
determined to try and escape in a balloon from Paris (then besieged by the
Germans) and succeeded, carrying his instruments with him. The weather
seriously interfered with the work of all the observers who went out to see

this eclipse, which was the more to be regretted because the preparations
had been on a very extensive and costly scale. The chief result was that it
was ascertained that the Red Flames (hence forward generally called
“Prominences”) are composed of hydrogen gas in an incandescent state.
The year 1871 saw, on December 12, another Indian eclipse, noteworthy
for the numerous and excellent photographs which were obtained of the
Corona, of the rifts in it, and of the general details, which were well
recorded on the plates.
There was an eclipse visible in South Africa on April 16, 1874. Some
useful naked eye views were obtained and recorded, but as no photographic
work was done, this eclipse cannot be said to come into line with those
which preceded or followed it.
In the following year, that is to say on April 6, 1875, there was a total
eclipse of the Sun, visible in the far East, especially Siam; but the distance
from England, coupled with the very generally unfavourable weather,
prevented this from being anything more than a second-class total eclipse,
so to speak, although extensive preparations had been made, and the sum of
£1000 had been granted by the British Government towards the expenses. A
certain number of photographs were obtained, but none of any very great
value.
Perhaps of the next eclipse which we have to consider, it may be said that
the circumstances were more varied than those of any other during the
second half of the 19th century. The eclipse in question occurred on July 29,
1878.
Several favourable circumstances concurred to make it a notable event.
In the first place, the central line passed entirely across the United States; in
other words, across a long stretch of inhabited and civilised territory,
accessible from both sides to a nation well provided with the requisite
scientific skill and material resources of every kind. But there was another
special and rare facility available: the central line crossed the chain of the
Rocky Mountains, an elevated locality, which an American writer speaks of
as overhung by “skies of such limpid clearness, that on several evenings
Jupiter’s satellites were seen with the naked eye.” On the summit of a
certain peak, known as Pike’s Peak, a party of skilled observers, headed by

Professor Langley, observed the wonderful developments of the Corona,
mentioned on a previous page. The fact that such a display came under the
eyes of man was no doubt mainly due to the superbly clear atmosphere
through which the observations were made. That this is not a mere
supposition may be inferred from the fact that at the lower elevation of only
8000 feet, instead of 14,000 feet, the Coronal streamers were seen by
Professor Newcomb’s party, far less extended than Langley saw them.
Perhaps the best proof of the importance of a diaphanous sky is to be found
in the fact that on the summit of Pike’s Peak, the Corona remained visible
for fully 4 minutes after the total phase had come to an end. A comparison
of the descriptions shows that even at the elevation of 10,200 ft. the
observers placed there, whilst they were better off than those at 8000 ft.,
assuredly did not see so much or so well as those at 14,000 ft.
There occurred a total eclipse on July 11, 1880, visible in California, but
as the totality lasted only 32 secs. and the Sun’s elevation was only 11°, not
much was got out of this eclipse notwithstanding that it was observed in a
cloudless sky at a station 6000 ft. above the sea.
The eclipse of May 17, 1882, yielded several interesting and important
features although the totality was short—only about 1¼ minutes. Here
again favourable local circumstances helped astronomers in more ways than
one. It was in Egypt that the eclipse was visible, and Egypt is a country
which it is exceedingly easy for travellers to reach, and it is also noted for
its clear skies. These were doubtless two of the reasons which combined to
inspire the elaborate preparations which were made for photographic and
spectroscopic observations. The former resulted in a very unprecedented
success. One of Dr. Schuster’s photographs of the totality showed not only
the expected Corona, but an unexpected comet.
Though on more than one previous occasion in history the darkness
which is a special accompaniment of a total eclipse had caused a comet to
be seen, yet the 1882 eclipse was the first at which a comet had thrust itself
upon the notice of astronomers by means of a photographic plate. It will be
remembered that the political circumstances of Egypt in 1882 were of a
somewhat strained character and probably this contributed to the
development of an unusual amount of astronomical competition in
connection with this eclipse. Not only did the Egyptian Government grant

special facilities, but strong parties went out representing England, France,
and Italy, although not perhaps in set terms at the direct instigation of their
respective Governments.
The next eclipse, that of May 6, 1883, had some dramatic features about
it. To begin with its duration was unusually long—nearly 5½ minutes, and
Mrs. Todd in her genial American style remarks:—“After the frequent
manner of its kind, the path lay where it would be least useful—across the
wind-swept wastes of the Pacific. But fortunately one of a small group of
coral islands lay quite in its line, and, nothing daunted, the brave scientific
men set their faces toward this friendly cluster, in cheerful faith that they
could locate there. Directed to take up their abode somewhere on a
diminutive island about which nothing could be ascertained beforehand,
save the bare fact of its existence at a known spot in mid-ocean, the
American observers were absent from the United States more than three
months, most of which time was spent in travelling, 15,000 miles in all,
with ten full weeks at sea. Their tiny foothold in the Pacific was Caroline
Island, a coral atoll on the outskirts of the Marquesas group.”
In spite of the unattractive, not to say forbidding, character of the place to
which they would have to go, parties of astronomers went out from
England, France, Austria, and Italy, and although rain fell on the morning of
the day the sky became quite clear by the time of totality and the
observations were completely successful. One of the pictures of the Corona
obtained by Trouvelot, an observer of French descent, but belonging to the
American party, has been often reproduced in books and exhibited the
Corona in a striking form. How few were the attractions of Caroline Island
as an eclipse station may be judged from the fact that the inhabitants
consisted of only four native men, one woman, and two children who lived
in three houses and two sheds.
On September 8, 1885, there occurred a total eclipse, which was seen as
such in New Zealand, but the observations were few, and with one
exception, unimportant and uninteresting. A certain Mr. Graydon, however,
made a sketch which showed at one point a complete break in the Corona
so that from the very edge of the Moon outwards into space, there was a
long and narrow black space showing nothing but a vacuity. If this was

really the condition of things, such a break in the Corona is apparently quite
unprecedented.
In 1886, on August 29, there occurred a total eclipse, visible in the West
Indies, which yielded various important results. It was unfortunate that for
the greater part of its length, the zone of totality covered ocean and not
land, the only land being the Island of Grenada and some adjacent parts of
South America. The resulting restriction as regards choice of observing
stations was the more to be regretted because the duration of the totality
was so unusually long, and therefore favourable, being more than 6½
minutes in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean. Parties of English, American,
and Italian astronomers assembled, however, at Grenada, and though the
weather was not the best possible, some interesting photographs were
obtained which exhibited an unusual development of hydrogen
protuberances. The central line in this eclipse not only stretched right across
the Atlantic, but entered Africa on the West Coast where a missionary saw
the eclipse as a mere spectator, and afterwards expressed his regret that no
astronomers were within reach with instruments to record the remarkable
Corona which was displayed to his gaze.
Though the unusual opportunities which, so far as the Sun and the Moon
were concerned, were afforded by the eclipse of 1886 were lost,
astronomers looked out hopefully for August 19, 1887, when another
eclipse was due to happen which, weather permitting, would be observable
over a very long stretch of land, from Berlin through Russia and Siberia to
Japan. Unusually extensive preparations were made in Russia at one end
and in Japan at the other, but clouds prevailed very generally, and the
pictures of the Corona which were obtained fell far short in number and
quality from what had been hoped for, having regard to the number and
importance of the stations chosen, and of the astronomers who made their
preparations thereat. An enthusiastic Russian, in the hopes of emancipating
himself from the risks of terrestrial weather at the Earth’s surface, went up
in a balloon to an elevation of more than two miles. His enthusiasm was so
far rewarded that he had a very clear view of a magnificent Corona; but as,
owing to some mischance, the balloon rose, conveying only the astronomer
and leaving behind his assistant who was to have managed the balloon, all
his time was engrossed by the management of the balloon, and he could do
very little in the way of purely astronomical work.

The year 1889 afforded two total eclipses of the Sun for which the usual
preparations were made. The first occurred on New Year’s Day, and the
path of the shadow crossed the North American Continent from California
to Manitoba. The weather was nearly everywhere very favourable, and an
enormous number of observers and instruments were assembled along the
central line. The consequence was that a very large number of photographs
were obtained. It may be said generally of this eclipse, that as it coincided
with a Sun-spot minimum, it left us in a position to learn very distinctly
what are the characteristic features of a solar Corona at a period which is
one of rest and repose on the Sun, at least, so far as regards visible Sun-
spots.
The second eclipse of 1889 occurred on December 22, and should have
been visible off the northern coast of South America and on the West Coast
of Africa. Attempts were made to utilise the South American chances by
English and American parties, whilst a small expedition comprising
astronomers of both nations went to Cape Ledo in West Africa. The African
efforts failed entirely owing to clouds, but the South American parties at
Cayenne were successful. One very deplorable result, however, arising out
of the expedition to Cayenne was the illness and subsequent death of the
Rev. S. J. Perry, S.J., who was struck down by malaria and died at sea on
the return journey. None who knew Mr. Perry personally could fail to
realise what a loss he was both to astronomy generally and to his own circle
of friends particularly.
On April 16, 1893, there happened a total eclipse of the Sun, which was
successfully watched by a large number of skilled observers throughout its
entire length. Indeed it is believed that only one party was unsuccessful.
The line of totality started on the coast of Chili, passed over the highlands
of that country, across the borders of Argentina and Paraguay, and over the
vast plains and forests of Central Brazil, emerging at about noon of local
time at a short distance to the N.-W. of Ceara on the North Atlantic
seaboard. Crossing the Atlantic nearly at its narrowest part, it struck the
coast of Africa N. of the river Gambia, and finally disappeared somewhere
in the Sahara. The South American observations were the most extensive
and successful, the latter fact being due to the circumstance that the sky at
many of the principal stations was pre-eminently favourable, owing to the
clearness and dryness of the atmosphere.

On Sept. 29, 1894, there was a total eclipse of the Sun, but as its duration
was brief and the zone of totality lay chiefly over the Indian Ocean,
practically nothing came of it.
Things seemed, however, much more promising for the total eclipse of
Aug. 9, 1896, and a very large number of observers went out to the North of
Norway hoping to catch the shadow at its European end, whilst a yacht
party went to Nova Zembla in the Arctic Ocean, and a few observers
travelled as far as Japan. So far as the very large number of would-be
observers who went from England to Norway were concerned, the eclipse
was a profound disappointment, for owing to bad weather practically
nothing was seen in Norway except on the West coast near Bodö, where the
weather was beautifully fine, but where no adequate preparations had been
made, because nobody believed that the coast would be free from fog.
Exceptionally fine weather prevailed at Nova Zembla, and the small but
select party who were kindly taken there by the late Sir G. B. Powell, M.P.,
in his yacht, were very fortunate, and an excellent series of photographs
was secured. One important result obtained at Nova Zembla was a full
confirmation by Mr. Shackleton of Prof. Young’s discovery in 1870 of the
“Reversing Layer,” a discovery which was long and vehemently disputed
by Sir Norman Lockyer. Fairly successful observations were made of this
eclipse in Siberia and Japan.
The last total eclipse of the Sun which has to be noticed as an
accomplished fact was the “Indian Eclipse” of Jan. 22, 1898, which was
very successfully seen by large numbers of people who went to India from
all parts of the world. As usual in all total eclipses of the Sun nowadays, the
photographers were very much to the front, and the photographs of the
inner Corona, taken by the Astronomer Royal, are thought to have been
probably the best that have yet been done. Amongst the miscellaneous
observations made, it may be mentioned that more stars were seen during
the second partial phases than during totality (a circumstance which had
been noticed by Don A. Ulloa as far back as 1778). It is stated also that a
mysterious object was seen between Mars and Venus by two officers of
H.M.S. Melpomene, which was not put down on the published chart as a
star to be looked for. The identity of this object has not been ascertained.

Footnotes:
[108] Memoirs, R.A.S., vol. x. p. 5.
[109] L’Annuaire, 1846, p. 303.
[110] Month. Not., R.A.S., vol. xx. p. 301; May 1860.

CHAPTER XIV.
THE ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH AS APPLIED TO ECLIPSES OF THE
SUN.

Amongst the auxiliary agencies which have been brought into use in
recent years, to enable astronomers the better to carry out systematic
observations of eclipses of the Sun, the electric telegraph occupies a place
which may hereafter become prominent. As it is not likely that this little
book will fall into the hands of any persons who would be able to make
much use of telegraphy in connection with eclipse observations, it will not
be necessary to give much space to the matter, but a few outlines will
certainly be interesting. When the idea of utilising the telegraph wire first
came into men’s minds, it was with the object of enabling observers who
saw the commencement of an eclipse at one end of the line of totality, to
give cautionary notices to observers farther on, or towards the far end, of
special points which had been seen at the beginning of the totality, and as to
which confirmatory observations, at a later hour, were evidently very
desirable. It is obvious that a scheme of this kind depends for its success
upon each end (or something like it) of the line of totality being in
telegraphic communication with the other end, and this involves a
combination of favourable circumstances not likely to exist at every
occurrence of a total eclipse, and in general only likely to prevail in the case
of eclipses visible over inhabited territory, such as the two Americas,
Europe, and parts of Asia. This use of the telegraph was, I think, first
proposed as far back as 1878, by an American astronomer, in connection
with the total eclipse of that year. His proposal fell upon sympathetic ears,
with the result that arrangements were concluded with the Western Union
Telegraph Company of North America for the expeditious forwarding of
messages from northern stations on the eclipse line to southern stations.
Some attention was being given at that time to the question of Intra-

Mercurial planets, and it was thought that if by good fortune any such
objects were unexpectedly found at the northern station, and observers at a
southern station could be advised of the fact, there might be a better chance
of procuring an accurate and precise record of the discovery. As it
happened, nothing came of it on that occasion, but the idea of utilising the
telegraph having once taken possession of men’s minds, it was soon seen
what important possibilities were opened up.
The want of telegraph organisation curiously made itself felt in the
Egyptian eclipse of 1882. It is stated in another chapter of this work that
during the total phase a comet was unexpectedly discovered. Now comets
sometimes move very rapidly (especially when they are near the Sun), and
had it been possible to have warned some observer to the E. of Egypt to
look out for this comet, and had he seen it even only a couple of hours after
it had been found in Egypt, some data respecting its position might have
been obtained which would have permitted a rough estimate being formed
of its movement through the heavens. Such an estimate might have enabled
astronomers to have hunted up the comet at sunset or sunrise on the days
immediately following the eclipse. As it happened, however, the comet was
not seen again in 1882, and, so far as we know, may never be seen again.
It was not till 1889 that a complete organisation of a telegraph service in
connection with an eclipse was accomplished. The eclipse of January 1 of
that year began in the Pacific and the line of totality touched land in
California, passing across North America to Manitoba. The first Californian
station was at Willows, and was occupied by a party from Harvard College
Observatory, who were supplied with an unusually complete equipment of
photographic apparatus, together with a large camera for charting all the
stars in the neighbourhood of the Sun, so as to detect an Intra-Mercurial
planet if one existed. The telegraph scheme which had to be worked out was
somewhat complicated, and one of the chief actors in the scene has
furnished a fairly full account of what was done. First of all, a complete list
of the instruments and of the work proposed to be done by them had to be
prepared. The weather probabilities being everywhere very unsatisfactory,
there was a possibility of all degrees of success or failure, and one thing
which had to be prearranged for each station was a cypher code which
should be available for all the likely combinations of instruments, weather
and results. It was found that about one hundred words would suffice for the

necessary code, including words which would indicate in a sufficiently
precise manner the position of any new planet which a photograph might
disclose.
The following, being a part of the code prescribed for use at Willows,
will serve to indicate the nature of the whole scheme:—
Africa, Perfectly clear throughout the whole eclipse.
Alaska, Perfectly clear during totality.
Belgium, Clear sky for the partial phases, but cloudy for totality.
Bolivia, Entirely cloudy throughout the whole eclipse.
Brazil, Observed all the contacts.
Bremen, Observed three of the contacts.
Ceylon, Made observations on the shadow-bands.
Chili, Observed lines of the reversing layer visually.
China, The Corona showed great detail.
Cork, Obtained 40-50 negatives during totality.
Corsica, Obtained 50-60 negatives during totality.
Crimea, Obtained 60-70 negatives during totality.
Cuba, Observed a comet.
Upwards of twenty codes were prepared for the like number of stations,
and the observers were to report their results at the earliest possible
moment. On a rehearsal of the programme the thought occurred that the
sending and reception of so many cypher messages in the ordinary course
of business might lead to delays which would be productive of serious
inconvenience, and that the success of the whole scheme could be only well
assured if a special wire, in direct circuit from New York to the eclipse
stations in turn, could be dedicated to the work. Thanks to the liberality of
the Western Union Telegraph Company this privilege was secured, and a
branch wire was led across from the Company’s New York office to the
office of the New York Herald, which journal had undertaken to be
responsible for the non-astronomical part of the business.
Mrs. Todd gives the following account of the final arrangements, and of
how they began to work when the moment for action arrived:—“From San
Francisco every California observer was within easy telegraphic reach, and

the wire thus extended by direct circuit to each eclipse station in turn. From
the editorial rooms of the Herald Professor Todd was in immediate
communication with any observers whom he chose to call. As previously
intimated, arrangements had been made with the Harvard astronomers at
Willows to receive their message first and with the utmost despatch, in
order to test the feasibility of outstripping the Moon. Shortly before 5
o’clock in the afternoon despatches began to come in. Of course a slight
delay was unavoidable, as the observers at the various stations were some
rods distant from the local telegraph offices, and it would take a few
minutes after the eclipse was over to prepare the suitable message from the
cypher code. On the astronomer’s table in the Herald office were a large
map and a chronometer. The latter indicated exact Greenwich time, and the
former showed the correct position of the Moon’s shadow at the beginning
of every minute by the chronometer. In this way it was possible to follow
readily the precise phase of the eclipse at every station. About the rooms
and accessible for immediate use were arranged the cypher codes pertaining
to the several stations and other papers necessary in preparing the reports
for the press. Everything being, as was supposed, in working order, New
York about a quarter of an hour before totality commenced inquired of
Willows the state of the weather. The answer was that the sky was getting
dark, and that there were no clouds anywhere near the Sun. At that time the
Moon’s shadow was travelling across the open waters of the Pacific. It
rapidly rushed along; totality came and went at Willows; a two minutes’
glimpse of the Corona was had, and the Corona swept rapidly eastwards.
After a brief interval Professor Pickering sent off from Willows a telegram
which began—“Alaska, China, Corsica,” and then the connection failed.
The break was located somewhere between California and Utah, and more
than half an hour elapsed ere the circuit was re-established, and the rest of
the message received. The remainder of the thrilling incidents of that
eventful day cannot possibly be better told than in Mrs. Todd’s crisp and
striking language[111]:—
“During this interval the lunar shadow, advancing over Montana and
Dakota, had left the Earth entirely, sweeping off again into space. Still,
however, the prospect that the telegraph might win the race was hopeful.
Had New York been located in the eclipse path as well as Willows, with
both stations symmetrically placed, the total eclipse would have become

visible at New York about an hour and a quarter after the shadow had left
California. Thus there was time to spare. Having recovered the wire,
Professor Pickering’s message was completed at 10h. 36m. [G.M.T.], the
cypher translated, and the stenographer’s notes were written out and
despatched to the composing-room six minutes later. The “copy” was
quickly put in type, and the hurried proof handed to Professor Todd at 10h.
50m., exactly an hour of absolute time after the observations were
concluded. Had the Moon’s shadow been advancing from California toward
New York, there was still a margin of several minutes before the eclipse
could become total at the latter place. In point of fact, while the proof sheet
of the first message was being read, the lunar shadow would have been
loitering among the Alleghanies. Man’s messenger had thus outrun the
Moon. The telegraphic reports of the other astronomers were gradually
gathered and put in type, and the forms of the Herald were ready for the
stereotyper at the proper time, some two hours after midnight. At 3 o’clock
a.m. the European mails closed, and the pouches put on board the steamship
Aller carried the usual copies for the foreign circulation. Within twenty-four
hours after the observations of the eclipse were made near the Pacific coast,
the results had been telegraphed to the Atlantic seaboard, collected and
printed, and the papers were well out on their journey to European readers.”
The foregoing narrative will make amply clear the future possibilities of
telegraphy as a coadjutor of Astronomy in the observation of total eclipses
of the Sun. And if the will and the funds are forthcoming, the eclipse of
May 28, 1900, will afford an excellent opportunity of again putting to the
test the excellent ideas of which our American friends worked out so
successfully ten years ago. The zone of totality in that eclipse passing as it
will through so many of the densely populated Southern States of North
America, and then through Portugal, Spain, and Algiers, great facilities will
present themselves for telegraphic combinations, if political and financial
difficulties do not interfere.

Footnotes:
[111] There is a want of uniformity in Mrs. Todd’s references to times which I
have not thought it necessary to put straight. “Greenwich Mean Time,” “Eastern

U.S. Standard Time,” and “Pacific Time,” are all severally quoted in happy-go-
lucky confusion.

CHAPTER XV.
ECLIPSES OF THE MOON—GENERAL PRINCIPLES.

In dealing with eclipses generally, but with more especial reference to
eclipses of the Sun, in a previous chapter, it was unavoidable to mix up in
some degree eclipses of the Moon with those of the Sun. There are,
however, distinctions between the two phenomena which make it
convenient to separate them as much as possible. Eclipses of the Moon are,
like those of the Sun, divisible into “partial” and “total” eclipses, but those
words have a different application in regard to eclipses of the Moon from
what they have when eclipses of the Sun are in question. A little thought
will soon make it clear why this should be the case. A partial eclipse of the
Sun results from the visible body of the Sun being in part concealed from us
by the solid body of the Moon, and so in a total eclipse there is total
concealment of the one object by the other.
But when we come to deal with partial and total eclipses of the Moon, the
situation, is materially different. The Moon becomes invisible by passing
into the dark shadow cast by the Earth into space.

Fig. 13.—THEORY OF AN ECLIPSE OF THE
MOON.

Fig. 13 will make this clear without the necessity of much verbal
explanation. S represents the Sun, E the Earth, and mn the orbit of the
Moon. It is obvious that whilst the Moon is moving from m to n it becomes
immersed in the Earth’s shadow. But before actually reaching the shadow
the Moon passes through a point in its orbit at which it begins to lose the
full light of the Sun. This is the entrance into the “penumbra” (or “Partial
shade”). Similarly, after the eclipse, when the Moon has emerged from the
full shadow it does not all at once come into full sunshine, but again passes
through the stage of penumbral illumination,[112] and under such
circumstances (to speak in the style of Old “Oireland”) the invisible Moon
is very often not invisible, and the part partially eclipsed is often not
eclipsed, and when the Moon is totally eclipsed it is frequently still visible.
Of course the general idea involved in all cases of a body passing into the
shadow of another body is that the body which so passes disappears,
because all direct light is cut off from it. In the case, however, of a lunar
eclipse this state of things is not always literally accomplished, and very
often some residual light reaches the Moon (of course from the Sun) with
the result that traces of the Moon may often be discerned. The laws which
govern this matter are very ill-understood. The fact remains that if we
examine a series of reports of observed eclipses of the Moon extending over
many centuries (and records exist which enable us to do this) we shall find
that in some instances when the Moon was “totally” eclipsed in the
technical sense of that word, it was still perfectly visible, whilst during
other eclipses it absolutely and entirely disappeared from view. Such
eclipses are sometimes spoken of as “black” eclipses of the Moon, but the
phrase is not a happy one. Many instances of both kinds will be found
mentioned in the chapter on historical lunar eclipses.[113]

Fig. 14.—CONDITIONS OF ECLIPSES OF THE
MOON.

The different conditions of eclipses of the Moon are illustrated by Fig. 14
which must be studied with the aid of the remarks made in a former chapter
concerning the apparent movements of the Sun and Moon and their nodal
passages. Suffice it to state here that in Fig. 14 AB represents the ecliptic,
and CD the Moon’s path. The three black circles are imaginary sections of
the Earth’s shadow as cast when the Earth is in three successive positions in
the ecliptic. If when the Earth’s shadow is near A the Moon should be at E,
and in Conjunction with the Earth the Moon will escape eclipse; if the
Conjunction takes place with both the Earth’s shadow and the Moon a little
further forward, say at F, the Moon will be partially obscured; but if the
Moon is at or very near its node, as at G, it will be wholly involved in the
Earth’s shadow and a total eclipse will be the result. In the case
contemplated at G in the diagram, the Moon is concentrically placed with
respect to the shadow, but the eclipse will equally be total even though the
two bodies are not concentrically disposed, so long as the Moon is wholly
within the cone of the Earth’s shadow.[114]
Just as in the case of the Sun so with the Moon there are certain limits on
the ecliptic within which eclipses of the Moon may take place, other
(narrower) limits within which they must take place, and again other limits
beyond which they cannot take place. Reverting to what has been said on a
previous page[115] with respect to these matters when an eclipse of the Sun
is in question it is only necessary to substitute for the word “Conjunction,”
the word “Opposition”; and for 18½° and 15¼° of longitude the figures
12½° and 9¼°. The limits in latitude will be 1° 3′ and 0° 52′ instead of
1° 34′ and 1° 23′. These substitutions made, the general ideas and facts
stated with regard to the conditions of an eclipse of the Sun will apply also
to the one of the Moon.
It is to be noted that whereas eclipses of the Sun always begin on the W.
side of the Sun, eclipses of the Moon begin on the E. side of the Moon. This
difference arises from the fact that the Sun’s movement in the ecliptic is
only apparent (it being the Earth which really moves), whilst the Moon’s
movement is real.
Eclipses of the Moon, though more often and more widely visible than
eclipses of the Sun, do not offer by any means the same variety of
interesting or striking phenomena to the mere star-gazer, and it was long

thought that they were in a certain sense of no use to science. Now,
however, astronomers are inclined to utilise them for determining the
diameter of the Moon by noting occultations[116] of stars by the Moon, the
duration of a star’s invisibility behind an eclipsed Moon being a measure of
the lunar diameter when such an observation is properly transformed and
“reduced.” Observations of the heat radiated (or rather reflected) by an
eclipsed Moon have also been made with the interesting result of showing
that during an eclipse the Moon’s power to reflect solar heat to the Earth
sensibly declines.
The duration of an eclipse of the Moon is dependent on its magnitude.
Where the eclipse is total the darkness, or what counts for such, may last for
nearly 4 hours, though this is an extreme limit rarely attained. An eclipse of
from 6 to 12 digits (to use the old-fashioned nomenclature which has been
already explained) will continue from 2½ to 3½ hours. An eclipse of 3 to 6
digits will last 2 or 3 hours, and a smaller eclipse only 1 or 2 hours. The
visual observations to be made in connection with partial or total eclipses of
the Moon chiefly relate to the appearances presented by our satellite when
immersed in the Earth’s shadow. On such occasions, as has been already
stated, it frequently happens that the Moon does not wholly disappear, but
may be detected either with a telescope or even without one. It may exhibit
either a dull grey appearance, or more commonly a pinkish-red hue to
which the designation “coppery” is generally applied. Perhaps the most
remarkable instance of this was the eclipse of March 19, 1848.
Mr. Forster who observed the phenomenon at Bruges thus describes[117]
what he saw:—“I wish to call your attention to the fact which I have clearly
ascertained, that during the whole of the late eclipse of March 19 the shaded
surface presented a luminosity quite unusual, probably about three times the
intensity of the mean illumination of the eclipsed lunar disc. The light was
of a deep red colour. During the totality of the eclipse the light and dark
places on the face of the Moon could be almost as well made out as on an
ordinary dull moonlight night, and the deep red colour where the sky was
clearer was very remarkable from the contrasted whiteness of the stars. My
observations were made with different telescopes, but all presented the
same appearance, and the remarkable luminosity struck everyone. The
British Consul at Ghent, who did not know there was an eclipse, wrote to

me for an explanation of the blood-red colour[118] of the Moon at 9
o’clock.”
In striking contrast to this stands the total eclipse of Oct. 4, 1884, which
is described by Mr. E. J. Stone[119] as “much the darkest that I have ever
seen, and just before the instant of totality it appeared as if the Moon’s
surface would be invisible to the naked eye during totality; but such was not
the case, for with the last appearance of the bright reflected sunlight there
appeared a dim circle of light around the Moon’s disc, and the whole
surface became faintly visible, and continued so until the end of totality.”
A total eclipse of the Moon which happened on January 28, 1888, was
observed in many places under exceptionally favourable circumstances as
regards weather. The familiar copper colour is spoken of by many
observers. The Rev. S. J. Perry makes mention[120] of patches of colour
even as bright as “brick red, almost orange in the brighter parts,” and this,
20 minutes before the total phase began. Mr. Perry conducted on this
occasion spectroscopic observations for the first time on an eclipsed Moon,
but no special results were obtained.
Various explanations have been offered for these diversities of
appearance. Undoubtedly they depend upon differences in the condition of
the Earth’s atmosphere, such as the unusual presence or unusual absence of
aqueous vapour; but it cannot be said that the laws which control these
diversities are by any means capable of being plainly enunciated,
notwithstanding that the explanation generally in vogue dates from as far
back as the time of Kepler. He suggested that the coppery hue was a result
of the refraction of the Earth’s atmosphere which had the effect of bending
the solar rays passing through it, so that they impinged upon the Moon even
when the Earth was actually interposed between the Sun and the Moon.
That the outstanding rays which became visible are red may be considered
due to the fact that the blue rays are absorbed in passing through the
terrestrial atmosphere, just as both the eastern and western skies are
frequently seen to assume a ruddy hue when illuminated in the morning or
evening by the solar rays at or near sunrise or sunset.
Owing to the variable meteorological condition of our atmosphere, the
actual quantity of light transmitted through it is liable to considerable

fluctuations, and no wonder therefore that variations occur in the
appearances presented by the Moon during her immersion in the Earth’s
shadow.
It has been suggested that if the portion of the Earth’s atmosphere
through which the Sun’s rays have to pass is tolerably free from aqueous
vapour, the red rays will be almost wholly absorbed, but not the blue rays;
and the resulting illumination will either only render the Moon’s surface
visible with a greyish blue tinge, or not visible at all. This will yield the
“black eclipse”—to recall the phrase quoted elsewhere. If, on the other
hand, the region of the Earth’s atmosphere through which the Sun’s rays
pass be highly saturated, it will be the blue rays which suffer absorption,
whilst the red rays will be transmitted and will impart a ruddy hue to the
Moon. Finally, if the Earth’s atmosphere is in a different condition in
different places, saturated in some parts and not in others, a piebald sort of
effect will be the result, and some portions of the Moon’s disc will be
invisible, whilst others will be more or less illuminated. Further illustrations
of all these three alternatives will be found amongst the eclipses of the
Moon recorded in the chapter[121] devoted to historical matters.
A few instances are on record of a curious spectacle connected with
eclipses of the Moon which must have a word of mention. I refer to the
simultaneous visibility of the Sun and the Moon above the horizon, the
Moon at the time being eclipsed. At the first blush of the thing this would
seem to be an impossibility, remembering that it is a cardinal principle of
eclipses, both of the Sun and of the Moon, that the three bodies must be in
the same straight line in order to constitute an eclipse. The anomalous
spectacle just referred to is simply the result of the refraction exercised by
the Earth’s atmosphere. The setting Sun which has actually set has
apparently not done so, but is displaced upwards by refraction. On the other
hand, the rising Moon which has not actually risen is displaced upwards by
refraction and so becomes, as it were, prematurely visible. In other words,
refraction retards the apparent setting of one body, the Sun, and accelerates
the apparent rising of the other body, the Moon. The effect of these two
displacements will be to bring the two bodies closer by more than 1° of a
great circle than they really are, this being the conjoint amount of the
double displacements due to refraction.

Amateur observers of eclipses of the Moon will find some pleasure, and
profit as well, in having before them on the occasion of an eclipse a picture
of the Moon’s surface in diagrammatic form with a few of the principal
mountains marked thereon; and then watching from time to time (say by
quarters of an hour) the successive encroachments of the Earth’s shadow on
the Moon’s surface and the gradual covering up of the larger mountains as
the shadow moves forward. The curved lines represent the gradual progress
of the shadow during the eclipse named. This diagram, ignoring the curved
lines actually marked on it, may be used over and over again for any
number of eclipses, simply noting from the Nautical Almanac or other
suitable ephemerides the points on the Moon’s disc at which the shadow
first touches the disc as it comes on, and last touches the disc as it goes off.
The Almanac indicates these points by stating that the eclipse begins, or
ends, as the case may be, at a point which is so many degrees from the N.
point of the Moon measured round the Moon’s circumference by the E. or
by the W. as the case may be.
One other point and we have disposed of eclipses of the Moon. The
shadow which we see creeping over the Moon during an eclipse is, as we
know, the shadow cast by the Earth. If we notice it attentively we shall see
that its outline is curved, and that it is in fact a complete segment of a circle.
Moreover that the circularity of this shadow is maintained from first to last
so far as we are able to follow it. What is this, then, but a proof of the
rotundity of the earth? This shape of the Earth’s shadow on the Moon
during a lunar eclipse was suggested as a proof of the rotundity of the Earth
by two old Greek astronomers, Manilius and Cleomedes, who lived about
2000 years ago, and is one more illustration of the great powers of
observation and the general acuteness of the natural philosophers of
antiquity.

Footnotes:
[112] The time occupied by the Moon in passing through the penumbra, before
and after a lunar eclipse, will generally run to about an hour for each passage. It
will occasionally happen that the Moon gets immersed in a penumbra but
escapes the dark shadow. Such an event will not be announced in the almanacs
under the head of “Eclipses.”

[113] See p. 197 (post).
[114] The shadow is spoken of as being in the form of a cone because it is
necessarily such on account of the light-giving disc of the Sun being so
enormously larger in diameter than the light-receiving sphere of the Moon. This
idea can be pursued by any reader with the aid of a lamp enclosed in a glass
globe and an opaque sphere such as a cricket ball.
[115] See p. 19 (ante).
[116] As to occultations see chap. xxi. (post).
[117] Month. Not., R.A.S., vol. viii. p. 132. March, 1848.
[118] A very striking chromolithograph of the lunar eclipses of Oct. 4, 1884, and
Jan. 28, 1888, showing the contrast of—(1) an almost invisible grey Moon, and
(2) a reddish-pink Moon, will be found in the German astronomical monthly,
Sirius, vol. xxi. p. 241. Nov. 1888.
[119] Month. Not., R.A.S., vol. xlv. p. 35.
[120] Month. Not., R.A.S., vol. xlviii. p. 227. March 1888.
[121] p. 197 (post).

CHAPTER XVI.
ECLIPSES OF THE MOON MENTIONED IN HISTORY.

We saw in a previous chapter that we owe to the Chinese the first record of
an eclipse of the Sun. It must now be stated that the same remark applies to
the first recorded eclipse of the Moon, and Prof. S. M. Russell is again our
authority. He refers to a book called the Chou-Shu or book of the Chou
Dynasty, said to have been found in 280 A.D. in the tomb of an Emperor
who lived many centuries previously. In this book it is stated that in the
35th year of Wen-Wang on the day Ping-Tzu there was an eclipse of the
Moon. Russell finds that this event may be assigned to January 29, 1136
B.C., and that the eclipse was total.

Next after this Chinese eclipse, in point of time, come several eclipses
recorded by Ptolemy, on the authority of records collected or examined by
himself. The three earliest of these came from Chaldæan sources.
The first of these eclipses was observed at Babylon, in the 27th year of
the era of Nabonassar, the 1st of the reign of Mardokempadius, on the 29th
of the Egyptian month Thoth, answering to March 19, 721 B.C. The eclipse
began before moonrise, and the middle of the totality appears to have
occurred at 9h. 30m. p.m. The other two eclipses, also observed at Babylon,
occurred on March 8, 720 B.C., and September 1, in the same year,
respectively.
Three other lunar eclipses, recorded by Ptolemy, assisted Sir I. Newton in
fixing the Terminus a quo from which the “70 weeks” of years were to run
which the prophet Daniel[122] predicted were to elapse before the death of
Christ. This Terminus a quo dates from the Restoration of the Jews under
Artaxerxes, 457 B.C. The three eclipses which Newton made use of were
those of July 16, 523, November 19, 502, and April 25, 491 B.C.

Aristophanes, in “The Clouds” (lines 561-66), makes an allusion to
which has been supposed (but probably without adequate warrant, in
Spanheim’s opinion), to refer to an eclipse of the Moon. The eclipse,
October 9, 425 B.C., has, moreover, been suggested as that referred to, but
the whole idea seems to me too shadowy.
An eclipse of the Moon took place in the 4th year of the 91st Olympiad,
answering to August 27, 413 B.C., which produced very disastrous
consequences to an Athenian army, owing to the ignorance and incapacity
of Nicias, the commander. The army was in Sicily, confronted by a
Syracusan army, and having failed, more or less, and sickness having
broken out, it was decided that the Athenians should embark and quit the
island. Plutarch, in his Life of Nicias, says:—“Everything accordingly was
prepared for embarkation, and the enemy paid no attention to these
movements, because they did not expect them. But in the night there
happened an eclipse of the Moon, at which Nicias and all the rest were
struck with a great panic, either through ignorance or superstition. As for an
eclipse of the Sun, which happens at the Conjunction, even the common
people had some idea of its being caused by the interposition of the Moon;
but they could not easily form a conception, by the interposition of what
body the Moon, when at the full, should suddenly lose her light, and assume
such a variety of colours. They looked upon it therefore as a strange and
preternatural phenomenon, a sign by which the gods announced some great
calamity.” And the calamity came to pass, but only indirectly was it caused
by the Moon!
Plutarch and Pliny both mention that eleven days before the victory of
Alexander over Darius, at Arbela in Assyria, there was an eclipse of the
Moon. Plutarch’s words (Life of Alexander) are, that “there happened an
eclipse of the Moon, about the beginning of the festival of the great
mysteries at Athens. The eleventh night after that eclipse, the two armies
being in view of each other, Darius kept his men under arms, and took a
general review of his troops by torch-light.” This seems to have led to a
great deal of disorderly tumult in the Assyrian camp, a fact which was
noticed by Alexander. Several of his friends urged him to make a night
attack on the enemy’s camp, but he preferred that his Macedonians should
have a good night’s rest, and it was then that he uttered the celebrated
answer, “I will not steal a victory.” Plutarch enters upon some rather

interesting moral reflections connected with this answer, but which of
course are foreign to the subject of this volume. This eclipse happened on
September 20, 331 B.C., and was total, the middle of the eclipse being at
about 8.15 p.m. It follows therefore, that the celebrated battle of Arbela was
fought on October 1, 331 B.C.
In 219 B.C. an eclipse of the Moon was seen in Mysia, according to
Polybius.[123] The date of September 1 has been assigned for this eclipse
which is said to have so greatly alarmed some Gaulish Mercenary troops in
the service of Attalus, King of Pergamos, that he had to get rid of them as
soon as he could—make terms with them to go home.
On the eve of the battle of Pydna when Perseus, King of Macedonia, was
conquered by Paulus Æmilius, there happened an eclipse of the Moon.
Plutarch in his Life of Paulus Æmilius, speaking of his army having settled
down in a camp, says:—“When they had supped and were thinking of
nothing but going to rest, on a sudden the Moon, which was then at full and
very high, began to be darkened, and after changing into various colours,
was at last totally eclipsed. The Romans, according to their custom, made a
great noise by striking upon vessels of brass and held up lighted faggots and
torches in the air in order to recall her light; but the Macedonians did no
such thing; horror and astonishment seized their whole camp, and a whisper
passed among the multitude that this appearance portended the fall of the
king. As for Æmilius, he was not entirely unacquainted with this matter; he
had heard of the ecliptic inequalities which bring the Moon at certain
periods under the shadow of the Earth and darken her till she has passed
that quarter of obscurity and receives light from the Sun again.
Nevertheless, as he was wont to ascribe most events to the Deity, was a
religious observer of sacrifices and of the art of divination, he offered up to
the Moon 11 heifers as soon as he saw her regain her former lustre. At break
of day he also sacrificed oxen to Hercules to the number of 20 without any
auspicious sign, but in the twenty-first the desired tokens appeared and he
announced victory to his troops, provided they stood upon the defensive.”
The astronomical knowledge ascribed in this account to Paulus Æmilius,
constitutes a very interesting feature in this record because the Romans
though they were good at most things, were by no means adepts at the
science of Astronomy. Livy[124] tells us that Sulpicius Gallus, one of the

Roman tribunes, foretold this eclipse, first to the Consul and then, with his
leave, to the army, whereby that terror which eclipses were wont to breed in
ignorant minds was entirely taken off and the soldiers more and more
disposed to confide in officers of so great wisdom and of such general
knowledge. This eclipse is often identified with that of June 21, 168 B.C.,
but Johnson gives reasons why this cannot be the case and that the eclipse
in question was that which happened on the night of June 10-11, 167 B.C.,
and commenced about midnight, whereas the eclipse of 168 B.C. was nearly
over when the Moon was above the horizon at Rome. Stockwell, however,
fixes on the eclipse of September 3, 172 B.C. as that which was connected
with the Battle of Pydna.
Josephus[125] speaking of the barbarous acts of Herod, says:—“And that
very night there was an eclipse of the Moon.” There has been some
controversy respecting the identification of this eclipse (the only one
mentioned by Josephus) which also is associated with Herod’s last illness, it
not having been easy to reconcile some discordant chronological statements
connected with the length of Herod’s reign and the date when he began to
reign. On the whole, probably, we shall be safe in saying that the reference
is to the eclipse of March 13, 4 B.C. This was a partial eclipse to the extent
of less than half the Moon’s diameter, a defalcation of light sufficient,
however, to attract public notice even at 3 a.m., seeing that no doubt, even
at that hour, the streets of Jerusalem were in a state of turmoil owing to the
burning alive by Herod of some seditious Rabbis.
It should be stated, however, that Hind assigns the account by Josephus
to the eclipse which occurred on January 9, 1 B.C. On this occasion the
Moon passed nearly centrally through the Earth’s shadow soon after
midnight, emerging at 2.57 a.m. on the early morning of January 10, local
Mean Time at Jerusalem.
Tacitus[126] mentions an eclipse of the Moon as having happened soon
after the death of Augustus. This has been identified with the eclipse of
September 27, A.D. 14. Tacitus says:—“The Moon in the midst of a clear
sky became suddenly eclipsed; the soldiers who were ignorant of the cause
took this for an omen referring to their present adventures: to their labours
they compared the eclipse of the planet, and prophesied ‘that if to the
distressed goddess should be restored her wonted brightness and splendour,

equally successful would be the issue of their struggle.’ Hence they made a
loud noise, by ringing upon brazen metal, and by blowing trumpets and
cornets; as she appeared brighter or darker they exulted or lamented.”
There was an eclipse of the Moon on the generally recorded date of the
Crucifixion of our Lord, April 3, A.D. 33. Hind found that our satellite
emerged from the Earth’s dark shadow about a quarter of an hour before she
rose at Jerusalem (6h. 36m. p.m.), but the penumbra continued upon her
disc for an hour afterwards.
On Jan. 1, A.D. 47, a total eclipse of the Moon was seen at Rome, and on
the same night an island rose up in the Ægean Sea.
The total eclipse of Feb. 22, A.D. 72, noted by Pliny,[127] is the first in
which it is recorded that Sun and Moon were both visible at the same time,
the eclipse occurring when the Sun was rising and the Moon setting.
Trithenius speaks of an eclipse of the Moon observed in the time of
Merovæus. Johnson identifies it with the eclipse of Sept. 15, 452 A.D. It was
from Merovæus that the line of French kings known as Merovingians
received their name.
On April 16, A.D. 683, according to Anastasius the Papal historian, the
Moon for nearly the whole night exhibited a blood-red appearance, and did
not emerge from obscurity till cockcrowing.
In A.D. 690 an eclipse of the Moon was observed in Wales. We are
told[128] that “the Moon was turned to the colour of blood.” This would
seem to be the first eclipse of the Moon recorded in Britain.
The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle tells us that in A.D. 734 “the Moon was as if
it had been sprinkled with blood, and Archbishop Tatwine and Beda died
and Ecgberht was hallowed bishop.” The intended inference apparently is
that the Moon had something to do with the deaths of the two ecclesiastics,
but this theory will not hold water. Beda, it may be remarked, is the correct
name of the man generally known to us as the “Venerable Bede.” It is
evident that from the description of the Moon it exhibited on that occasion
the well-known coppery hue which is a recognised feature of many total
eclipses of our satellite. This eclipse occurred on January 24, beginning at
about 1 a.m.

On the night of January 23, A.D. 753, “the Moon was covered with a
horrid black shield.” This is the record of an eclipse. It occurred at about
midnight, and apparently we are entitled to infer that on this occasion the
Moon disappeared altogether, instead of being discoverable during the total
phase by exhibiting a coppery hue.
In A.D. 755 [or 756 in orig.], on November 23, there happened an
exceedingly interesting event which stands, I think, without a precedent in
the annals of science—an eclipse of the Moon contemporaneous with an
occultation of a planet by the Moon. This singular combination is thus
described in the annals of Roger de Hoveden[129]:—“On the 8th day before
the Calends of December the Moon on her 15th day being about her full,
appeared to be covered with the colour of blood, and then the darkness
decreasing she returned to her usual brightness; but, in a wondrous manner,
a bright star followed the Moon, and passing across her, preceded her when
shining, at the same distance which it had followed her before she was
darkened.” The details here given are not astronomically quite correct, but
let that pass; the writer’s intention is fairly clear. Calculation shows that the
eclipse occurred on November 23, and that the planet, which was Jupiter,
was concealed in the evening by the Moon for about an hour from 7h. 30m.
to 8h. 30m. p.m., the immersion taking place about the end of the total
phase. This is the first occultation of a star or planet by the Moon observed
and recorded in England.
Under the year 795 the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle says:—“In this year the
Moon was eclipsed between cockcrowing and dawn on the 5th of the
Calends of April; and Eardwalf succeeded to the kingdom of the
Northumbrians on the 2nd of the Ides of May.” This signifies that the
eclipse happened on March 28 between 3h. and 6h. in the morning, the
method of dividing the hours of night into equal portions of three hours
each being still in use. There was no eclipse in 795 on the date in question
but there was one in 796, so we may suppose an error in the year. This
assumed, Johnson found that the eclipse began at about 4h. a.m., was total
for nearly an hour, and ended at about 7½h., so that the Moon set eclipsed.
But the above assumption is dispensed with by Lynn who substitutes one of
his own.[130] For “5th of the Calends” he reads “5th of the Ides,” which
means April 9; and on that day in 795 he says there was an eclipse of the
Moon, but I have not found any other record of it.

In the year A.D. 800, according to the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, “the Moon
was eclipsed at the 2nd hour of the night (8h. p.m.) on the 17th day of the
Calends of February.” Johnson finds that there was an eclipse of the Moon
on Jan. 15. The middle of the eclipse occurred at 8h. 34m., 9⁄10ths of the
Moon’s upper limb having been obscured.
Under the date of 806 the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle says:—“This year was
the Moon eclipsed on the Kalends [1st] of September; and Eardwulf, King
of the Northumbrians, was driven from his kingdom, and Eanberht, Bishop
of Hexham, died.” This eclipse was total, the totality lasting from 9h. 37m.
to 10h. 59m. p.m.
On Feb. 15, 817, according to the Annales Fuldenses, an eclipse of the
Moon was observed in the early evening at Paris, and on the same night a
Comet was seen. This Comet is described by another authority as a
“monstrous” one and as being in Sagittarius on Feb. 5. The Chinese date it
for Feb. 17, and place it near the stars α and γ Tauri.
In 828 two lunar eclipses were seen in Europe, the first on July 1 very
early in the morning, and the second on the morning of Christmas Day. The
Anglo-Saxon Chronicle thus speaks of the second eclipse:—“In this year the
Moon was eclipsed on Mid-winter’s Mass-night, and the same year King
Ecgbryht subdued the kingdom of the Mercians and all that was South of
the Humber.” The totality occurred after midnight. There is some confusion
in the year of this eclipse, the Chronicle giving it as 827, whilst calculation
shows that it must have been 828. Lynn defines “Mid-winter’s Mass-night”
as Christmas Eve.
Under the date of 904 the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle says:—“In this year the
Moon was eclipsed.” There were two total eclipses of the Moon this year,
one on May 31, and the other on Nov. 25, and it does not appear which one
is referred to in the Chronicle cited. Another writer, Cedrenus, speaks of a
great eclipse of the Moon this year which he says foretold the death of a
kinsman of the Emperor.
On October 6, 1009, there was a total eclipse of the Moon which
presumably is referred to in the statement that “this year the Moon was
changed into blood.”

On Nov. 8, 1044, there was a large partial eclipse in the morning. Raoul
Glaber[131] (a French chronicler who died about 1050) comments upon it
thus:—“In what manner it happened, whether a prodigy brought to pass by
the Deity or by the intervention of some heavenly body, remains known to
the author of knowledge. For the Moon herself became like dark blood,
only getting clear of it a little before the dawn.” Truly those times were the
“Dark Ages” in which ignorance and folly were rampant, seeing that more
than 1000 years previously the Greeks knew all about the causes of
eclipses.
Under 1078 the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle says:—“In this year the Moon
was eclipsed 3 nights before Candlemas, and Ægelwig, the ‘world-wide’
Abbot of Evesham, died on St. Juliana’s Mass-day [Feb. 16]; and in this
year was the dry summer, and wildfire came in many Shires and burned
many towns.” Johnson found that a total eclipse of the Moon happened in
the early evening of Jan. 30.
On May 5, 1110, in the reign of Henry I., there occurred a total eclipse of
the Moon during which, says the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, “the Moon
appeared in the evening brightly shining and afterwards by little and little
its light waned, so that as soon as it was night it was so completely
quenched that neither light nor orb nor anything at all of it was seen. And so
it continued very near until day, and then appeared full and brightly shining.
It was on this same day a fortnight old. All the night the air was very clear,
and the stars over all the heaven were brightly shining. And the tree-fruits
on that night were sorely nipt.” The totality occurred before mid-night. It is
evident that this was an instance of a “black” eclipse when the Moon
becomes quite invisible instead of shining with the familiar coppery hue.
In 1117 there were two total eclipses, the first on June 16, and the second
on December 10. The latter is thus referred to in the Anglo-Saxon
Chronicle:—“In the night of the 3rd of the Ides of December the Moon was
far in [during a long time of] the night as if it were all bloody, and
afterwards eclipsed.” The totality commenced at 11.36 p.m.
It is recorded by Matthew Paris[132] in connection with the death of
Henry I. that “the Moon also was eclipsed the same year on the 29th of
July” [1135]. These words seem to indicate a total eclipse of the Moon.

Johnson gives the date as Dec. 22, 1135. If this is correct the text of the
Chronicle must be corrupt. The whole eclipse was not visible in England,
the Moon setting before the middle of the eclipse. Stephen had been
crowned king the same day, namely Dec. 22.
On June 30, 1349, there was a total eclipse of the Moon visible at
London to which some interest attaches. Archdeacon Churton[133] connects
it with the following incident:—“The worthy Abp. Bradwardine, who
nourished in the reign of the Norman Edwards, and died A.D. 1349, tells a
story of a witch who was attempting to impose on the simple people of the
time. It was a fine summer’s night, and the Moon was suddenly eclipsed.
‘Make me good amends,’ said she, ‘for old wrongs, or I will bid the Sun
also to withdraw his light from you.’ Bradwardine, who had studied the
Arabian astronomers, was more than a match for this simple trick, without
calling in the aid of the Saxon law. ‘Tell me,’ he said, ‘at what time you will
do this, and we will believe you; or if you will not tell me, I will tell you
when the Sun or the Moon will next be darkened, in what part of their orb
the darkness will begin, how far it will spread, and how long it will
continue.’”
An eclipse of the Moon which happened when Columbus was at the
Island of Jamaica proved of great service to him when he was in difficulties
owing to the want of food supplies which the inhabitants refused to afford.
The eclipse was a total one, and so far as the description goes the eclipses
of April 2, 1493, and March 1, 1504, both respond to the recorded
circumstances: both were total and both occurred soon after sunset. But,
inasmuch as in the life of Columbus written by his son the incident is
placed nearly at the end of the work, there can be no doubt that it is the later
of the above eclipses which was the one in question. The story is very
graphically told by Sir A. Helps[134] in the words following:—
“The Indians refused to minister to their wants any longer; and famine
was imminent. But just at this last extremity, the admiral, ever fertile in
devices, bethought him of an expedient for re-establishing his influence
over the Indians. His astronomical knowledge told him that on a certain
night an eclipse of the Moon would take place. One would think that people
living in the open air must be accustomed to see such eclipses sufficiently
often not to be particularly astonished at them. But Columbus judged—and

as the event proved, judged rightly—that by predicting the eclipse he would
gain a reputation as a prophet, and command the respect and the obedience
due to a person invested with supernatural powers. He assembled the
caciques of the neighbouring tribes. Then, by means of an interpreter, he
reproached them with refusing to continue to supply provisions to the
Spaniards. ‘The God who protects me,’ he said, ‘will punish you. You know
what has happened to those of my followers who have rebelled against me;
and the dangers which they encountered in their attempt to cross Haiti,
while those who went at my command made the passage without difficulty.
Soon, too, shall the divine vengeance fall on you; this very night shall the
Moon change her colour and lose her light, in testimony of the evils which
shall be sent upon you from the skies.’
“The night was fine: the moon shone down in full brilliancy. But at the
appointed time the predicted phenomenon took place, and the wild howls of
the savages proclaimed their abject terror. They came in a body to
Columbus and implored his intercession. They promised to let him want for
nothing if only he would avert this judgment. As an earnest of their
sincerity they collected hastily a quantity of food and offered it at his feet.
At first, diplomatically hesitating, Columbus presently affected to be
softened by their entreaties. He consented to intercede for them; and,
retiring to his cabin, performed, as they supposed, some mystic rite which
should deliver them from the threatened punishment. Soon the terrible
shadow passed away from the face of the moon, and the gratitude of the
savages was as deep as their previous terror. But being blended with much
awe, it was not so evanescent as gratitude often is; and henceforth there was
no failure in the regular supply of provisions to the castaways.”
Tycho Brahe observed a lunar eclipse on July 7, 1590. He writes:—“In
the morning about 3¾h. the Moon began to be eclipsed: in this eclipse it is
notable that both luminaries were at the same time above the horizon; a like
case which Pliny cites. For the centre of the Sun emerged when the Moon
was 2° elevated above the Western horizon, and when her centre was
setting, the centre of the Sun was elevated nearly 2°.”[135]
On August 16, 1598, there occurred a total eclipse of the Moon, observed
by Kepler,[136] in which during totality a part of the Moon was visible and
the rest invisible. He says, that while one-half of the disc was seen with

great difficulty the other half was discernible by a deep red light of such
brilliancy that at first he was doubtful whether our satellite was immersed in
the Earth’s shadow at all. This is an instance of the simultaneous operation
of those causes (whatever they may be) which result in a totally-eclipsed
Moon being sometimes wholly invisible and sometimes entirely visible as a
copper-coloured disc.
An eclipse of the Moon which happened on the morning of July 6, 1610,
may be mentioned as having been the first to be viewed through a
telescope. The eclipse was only a large partial one. The following record of
the fact is due to Tycho Brahe.[137] “The beginning of the eclipse of the
Moon as observed through the Roman telescope, appeared like a dark
thread in contact with the shadow”—a description which cannot be said to
be unduly explicit.
In 1620, on June 15, there was a total eclipse of the Moon, when during
the total phase “the Moon was seen with great difficulty. It shone,
moreover, like the thinnest nebula, far fainter than the Milky Way, without
any copper tinge. About the middle of the second hour nothing at all could
be seen of the Moon with the naked eye, and through the telescope so
doubtfully was anything seen that no one could tell whether the Moon was
not something else.” It is expressly stated, however, that the sky was quite
clear. Kepler also observed this eclipse, and says that the Moon quite
disappeared, though stars of the 4th and 5th magnitudes were plainly
visible.[138] In this same year 1620, there was on December 9 another total
eclipse, when “the Moon altogether disappeared so that nothing could be
seen of it, though the stars shone brightly all around: she continued lost and
invisible for a quarter of an hour more or less.” This observation seems to
have been made at Ingolstadt.
Wendelinus mentions the eclipse of April 14, 1623, in connection with
the question of the visibility of the Moon when totally eclipsed. He says,
“but sometimes it so far retains the light derived from the Sun that you
would doubt whether any part of it were eclipsed.” This eclipse was
observed by Gassendi, and if the above record is correct, it is the more
remarkable seeing that the eclipse was not total, only 11⁄12ths of the Moon’s
diameter being obscured.

On April 25, 1642, on the occasion of a total eclipse, Hevelius[139] noted
that the Moon wholly disappeared when immersed in the Earth’s shadow.
Crabtree is stated by Flamsteed[140] to have observed this eclipse, but he
does not plainly state that he lost sight of the Moon. Crabtree or his editor
dates this eclipse for April 4; Ferguson for April 15. There appears to be
some muddle as between “old style” and “new style.” Ferguson professing
to be N.S. is evidently wrong. Hevelius gives the double date, 15⁄25, which is
evidently right.
On June 16, 1666, the Moon was seen in Tuscany to rise eclipsed, the
Sun not having yet set in the W.
On May 26, 1668, an eclipse of the Moon was in progress in the early
morning, when the Sun was seen to rise by members of the Academy of
Sciences who were observing the phenomenon at Montmartre near Paris.
On December 23, 1703, the Moon when totally immersed was seen at
Avignon showing a ruddy light of such brilliancy that we are told it had the
appearance of a transparent body illuminated by a light placed behind.
Johnson finds that the total phase took place in the early morning, and
lasted from 5h. 36m. to 7h. 22m. a.m.
The lunar eclipse of May 18, 1761, as observed by Wargentin,[141] at
Stockholm, furnishes a remarkable instance of the invisibility of the Moon
on certain occasions, when completely immersed in the earth’s shadow. The
total immersion of the Moon took place at 10h. 41m. p.m. The part of the
margin of the lunar disc which had last entered the shadow was fairly
conspicuous for 5 or 6 minutes after the immersion, and to the naked eye
exhibited a lustre equal to that of a star of the 2nd magnitude; but at 10h.
52m. this part, as well as the whole of the rest of the Moon’s body, “had
disappeared so completely, that not the slightest trace of any portion of the
lunar disc could be discerned either with the naked eye or with the
telescope, although the sky was clear, and the stars in the vicinity of the
Moon were distinctly visible in the telescope.” After more than half an
hour’s search, Wargentin at length discovered the whereabouts of the Moon
by means of a faint light, which was visible at the Eastern edge of the disc.
A few minutes afterwards, some persons of acute vision were able to

discern, with the naked eye, a trace of the Moon, looking like a patch of
thin vapour, but more than half the disc was still invisible.
An eclipse of the Moon, on March 29, 1801, was observed by Humboldt,
on board ship, off the Island of Baru, not far from Cartagena de las Indias,
in the Caribbean Sea.[142] He remarks that he was “exceedingly struck with
the greater luminous intensity of the Moon’s disc under a tropical sky than
in my native North.” Johnson makes Humboldt to refer to the greater
clearness of the “reddened disc,” but these words do not appear either in the
German or in the English version.
A total eclipse of the Moon occurred on June 10, 1816. As observed by
Beer and Mädler and others, the Moon completely disappeared. The
summer of 1816, be it remembered, was very wet, and probably this had
something to do with the Moon’s invisibility at the eclipse in question.
On October 13, 1837, there happened a total eclipse of the Moon, of
which Sir J. Herschel and Admiral W. H. Smyth have left us interesting
accounts.[143] The changes of tint, both as regards times and places on the
Moon’s disc, recorded by the latter, are very remarkable. And the tints
themselves varied very much inter se: The Admiral speaks of “copper,”
“sea-green,” “neutral tint,” and “silvery,” as hues visible in one part of the
Moon or another, and at one time or another.

Footnotes:
[122] Dan. ix. 24.
[123] Histories, Book v., chap. lxxviii.
[124] Hist. Rom., Lib. xliv., cap. 37.
[125] Antiq., Lib. xvii., cap. 6, sec. 4.
[126] Annales, Lib. i., cap. 28.
[127] Nat. Hist., Lib. ii., cap. 3.
[128] Annales Cambriæ, Rolls ed., p. 8.
[129] Annales, Rogerus de Hoveden, Bohn’s ed., p. 5.
[130] Observatory, vol. xv. p. 224. May 1892.

[131] Historiarum sui Temporis, Lib. v., cap. 3.
[132] Chronica Majora, Rolls ed., edited by the Rev. H. R. Luard, vol. ii. p. 161.
Another version of this work is in circulation under the name of Rogerus de
Wendover, Flores Historiarum. The passage here quoted appears in vol. i. p.
482, Bohn’s ed.
[133] History of the Early English Church, 1870 ed., p. 271.
[134] Life of Columbus, p. 247.
[135] Historia Cœlestis, vol. i. p. xci.
[136] Astronomiæ Pars Optica, p. 276; Opera Omnia, vol. ii. p. 302; Frisch’s
edition.
[137] Historia Cœlestis, vol. ii. p. 921.
[138] Epitomes Astronomiæ, p. 825; Opera Omnia, vol. vi. p. 482; Frisch’s
edition.
[139] Selenographia, p. 117.
[140] Historia Cœlestis, vol. i. p. 4.
[141] Phil. Trans., vol. lii. p. 210. 1762.
[142] Cosmos. Trans. Sabine, vol. iii. p. 356; vol. iv. p. 483. Bohn’s ed.
[143] Cycle of Celest. Obj., vol. i. p. 144; transcribed in G. F. Chambers’s
Handbook of Astronomy, vol. i. p. 329.

CHAPTER XVII.
CATALOGUES OF ECLIPSES: AND THEIR CALCULATION.

This must of necessity be a brief chapter, so far as mere lines of text are
concerned, but it will not on that account be unimportant. It will be evident
to the reader that many more eclipses of interest have happened, and will
happen, than it has been possible to speak of in these pages. Accordingly, as
it is one of the main objects of this series of volumes to create a thirst for
knowledge, to be satisfied by the study of other and bigger volumes, it will
be desirable to furnish a list of some of the various books and publications,
in which eclipses will be found catalogued or described in detail, so that
readers desirous of pursuing the matter further, may possess facilities for
doing so.
By far the most complete and comprehensive catalogue of solar eclipses
is that prepared some years ago by an Austrian astronomer, the late
Theodore Von Oppolzer of Vienna, and published under the title of Canon
der Finsternisse, in the Memoirs of the Imperial Academy of Sciences.[144]
This work supplies approximate calculations of about 8000 eclipses of the
Sun, for a period of more than 3000 years, from November 10, 1207 B.C.
(Julian Calendar), to November 17, 2161 A.D. (Gregorian Calendar). There
are appended 160 charts, of all the principal eclipses; but as the charts only
exhibit the beginnings, middles, and ends of the eclipses dealt with, they are
frequently misleading, because the intermediate lines of path are, in many
cases, more or less considerably curved.
Another very important and comprehensive catalogue of eclipses, solar
and lunar together, will be found in the well-known French work, L’Art de
vérifier les Dates,[145] compiled by a member of the religious order of St.
Maur. One volume of this famous work contains eclipses from the year

1001 B.C. to the Christian Era, whilst another volume gives a similar
catalogue from the year 1 A.D. to 2000 A.D. The other volumes deal with
chronological matters only. Although not strictly a work of extreme
astronomical exactness, yet L’Art de vérifier les Dates stands unrivalled as a
record not only to subserve the purpose indicated by its title, but of the bare
facts of the eclipses which have happened during the period of 3000 years
stated above.
There has not been much done in England in the way of publishing
eclipse records or tables, past or future, but in the British Almanac and
Companion for 1832 there is given a catalogue, which was useful in its day,
of eclipses, then future from 1832 to 1900, omitting, however, solar eclipses
hardly visible to any inhabited portion of the Earth, and lunar eclipses
where the part of the Moon’s diameter obscured was less than 1⁄12th.
In by-gone days several attempts were made to gather together in a
tabular or paragraph form the details of eclipses which had happened, and
some of these have been important sources of information for the guidance
of us moderns. Foremost amongst these efforts must be named the
Almagestum Novum of J. B. Ricciolus.[146] This work contains a catalogue
of eclipses observed from 772 B.C. to A.D. 1647, and continued in tables to
A.D. 1700. It is prefaced (pp. 286-8) by a long series of quotations from
classical authors relating to eclipses, some few of which have already been
mentioned in these pages.
Kepler paid much attention to eclipses, and left behind him a large mass
of notes and original observations. These will be found chiefly in his
Astronomiæ Pars Optica, c. vii. § 2, originally published at Frankfurt in
1604. The most convenient and accessible edition of this is to be found in
Frisch’s reprint of all Kepler’s works.[147]
Tycho Brahe also gathered together from various sources many
observations of eclipses, and combined them with a number of his own, the
whole being published in his Historia Cœlestis.[148] Tycho Brahe was a very
interesting personage in spite of the fact that he went all astray on the
subject of the system of the Universe, and he well deserves, what has been
given to him, a book[149] all to himself. It is peculiarly appropriate that I
should give him a good word in this little volume on eclipses, because it

was the solar eclipse of Aug. 21, 1560, which first seriously led him to take
up astronomical pursuits, he being then 14 years of age, and struck with
wonder that eclipses could be predicted.
A vast amount of historical and other information respecting eclipses will
be found in a book, the latinised name of whose author is Sethus Calvisius.
The title of the work is Opus Chronologicum.[150] The historical matter is
very much mixed, but the eclipses can be got hold of through the Index,
which is very full. P. Gassendi,[151] a well-known astronomer of the 17th
century, left behind him observations of many eclipses observed by himself
between 1628 and 1655. In a book entitled An Introduction to Universal
Geography,[152] one Nicolas Struyck in the middle of the 18th century
published a very full array of eclipse observations collected with infinite
pains from an endless variety of authors ancient and modern.
In 1757 the well-known James Ferguson reprinted in his Astronomy,[153]
but in a very condensed form, all Struyck’s eclipses from 721 B.C. to A.D.
1485. Then he carried on his catalogue to 1800 by means of the materials
furnished by Ricciolus and L’Art de vérifier les Dates. Ferguson also
invented a machine for illustrating mechanically the circumstances of an
eclipse. He called it the “Eclipsareon.” A full description is given in his
book, mentioned above, but I do not know whether any such instrument is
still in existence, or, if so, where it is to be found.
Ferguson apologises[154] for the incompleteness of his eclipse
information in the following words:—“I have not cited one half of
Ricciolus’s list of portentous eclipses, and for the same reason that he
declines giving any more of them than what that list contains, namely, that
‘tis most disagreeable to dwell any longer on such nonsense, and as much
as possible to avoid tiring the reader. The superstition of the ancients may
be seen by the few here copied. My author further says that there were
treatises written to show against what regions the malevolent effects of any
particular eclipse was aimed, and the writers affirmed that the effects of an
eclipse of the Sun continued as many years as the eclipse lasted hours, and
that of the Moon as many months.”
The most comprehensive (indeed almost the only) modern English book
on eclipses is the Rev. S. J. Johnson’s,[155] of which frequent use has

already been made in these pages. It contains a vast amount of matter put
together in a condensed form but the references to authorities are rather
defective and deficient. Less comprehensive in one sense yet exceedingly
valuable and interesting as a succinct summary of solar eclipse knowledge
up to the date of 1896 is Mrs. D. P. Todd’s excellent little volume[156] which
has been several times quoted on previous pages. On various occasions in
1890 and following years Professor J. N. Stockwell contributed to the
American Astronomical Journal a number of papers[157] discussing in a
very interesting and exhaustive manner many of the eclipses recorded by
the ancient classical authors. These papers should be consulted by all who
desire to realise the value of eclipse records in connection with mundane
chronology.
The calculation of eclipses is a matter of some interest. It is beyond the
scope of the present work to explain even in outline the methods in use, but
with the aid of the books mentioned below[158] a reader possessed of the
necessary time, mathematical knowledge, and patience, will be able to
pursue this matter as far as his inclination may lead him. Johnson has found
very useful the tables given in the eighth edition of the Encyclopædia
Britannica (Article, “Astronomy”) but strange to say these tables do not
appear in ninth edition of that famous work.
Lalande[159] has given numerous references to eclipses of the Sun during
the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries which may be useful to those who wish to
work at the history of eclipses.

Footnotes:
[144] Denkschriften der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, vol. lii.
Vienna, 1887.
[145] There are several editions of this work in circulation. The first (published
in 1783) was in folio volumes, but the best known edition is in a large number of
octavo volumes published in 1818 and following years. The eclipse lists will be
found in the 1st volumes of the first and second series respectively. The French
astronomer, Pingré, is responsible for them.
[146] Published at Bononia (Bologna) in 1653.
[147] Omnia Opera, vol. ii. pp. 311-16. Edited by Ch. Frisch. 8 vols. 8vo.
Frankofurti-a-M., 1857-60.

[148] A collected edition of Tycho Brahe’s works, edited by “Lucius Barettus,”
was published at Augustæ Vindilicorum (Augsburg) in 1666. Lucius Barettus is
an anagram for the real name Albertus Curtius.
[149] J. L. E. Dreyer, Tycho Brahe: a Picture of Scientific Life and Work in the
Sixteenth Century.
[150] Opus Chronologicum. Francofurti ad Mœnum, 1650.
[151] Astronomica, vol. iv. Lugduni, 1657.
[152] Inleiding tot de Algemeene Geographie. Amsterdam, 1740.
[153] Astronomy Explained upon Sir Isaac Newton’s Principles. 2nd ed. 4to, pp.
167-79. London, 1757.
[154] Astronomy, p. 178.
[155] Historical and Future Eclipses. 2nd Ed., 1896.
[156] Total Eclipses of the Sun. Boston, U.S., 1894.
[157] Astronomical Journal, vol. x. pp. 25, 185; vol. xi. pp. 5, 28, 57; vol. xii. p.
121; vol. xiii. p. 73; vol. xv. p. 73; vol. xvi. pp. 89, 175.
[158] J. Ferguson. Op. cit.; W. D. Snooke, Brief Astronomical Tables for the
Expeditious Calculation of Eclipses, 8vo. Lond. 1852.

CHAPTER XVIII.
STRANGE ECLIPSE CUSTOMS.

I had intended heading this chapter “Eclipse Customs amongst Barbarous
Nations,” but in these days it is dangerous to talk of barbarians or to speak
one’s mind on points of social etiquette so I have thought it well to tone
down the original title, otherwise I should have the partisans of the
“Heathen Chinee” holding me up to scorn as a reviler of the brethren.
Did space permit a very interesting record might be furnished of eclipse
customs in foreign parts.
An eclipse happened during Lord Macartney’s embassy to China[160]
which kept the Emperor and his Mandarins for a whole day devoutly
praying the gods that the Moon might not be eaten up by the great dragon
which was hovering about her. The next day a pantomime was performed,
exhibiting the battle of the dragon and the Moon, and in which two or three
hundred priests, bearing lanterns at the end of long sticks, dancing and
capering about, sometimes over the plain, and then over chairs and tables,
bore no mean part.
Professor Russell, who is quoted elsewhere in this work with respect to
Chinese eclipses, makes the following remarks in regard to what happens
now in China when eclipses occur:—“It will be interesting here to note that,
even at present, by Imperial command, special rites are performed during
solar and lunar eclipses. A president from each of the six boards, with two
inferior officials, dressed in their official clothes, proceed to the T’ai-
Ch’ang-Ssu. When the eclipse begins they change their robes for common
garments made of plain black material, and kneeling down, burn incense.
The president then beats one stroke on a gong, and the ceremony is taken up
by all the attendant officials.”

A writer in Chambers’s Journal[161] in an article entitled “The Hindu
view of the late Eclipse,” gives an interesting and original account of divers
Hindu superstitions and ceremonies which came under his notice in
connection with the total eclipse of the Sun of Aug. 18, 1868. He remarks
that “European science has as yet produced but little effect upon the minds
of the superstitious masses of India. Of the many millions who witnessed
the eclipse of the 18th of August last there were comparatively few who did
not verily believe that it was caused by the dragon Rahu in his endeavour to
swallow up the Lord of Day.... The pious Hindu, before the eclipse comes
on, takes a torch, and begins to search his house and carefully removes all
cooked food, and all water for drinking purposes. Such food and water, by
the eclipse, incur Grahana seshah, that is, uncleanness, and are rendered
unfit for use. Some, with less scruples of conscience, declare that the food
may be preserved by placing on it dharba or Kusa grass,” and much more
to the like effect is duly set out in the interesting article cited.
During the total eclipse of the Sun of Aug. 7, 1869, the following
incident is noted[162] to have occurred at a station on the Chilkaht river, in
Alaska, North America, frequented by Indians:—
“About the time the Sun was half obscured the chief Koh-Klux and all
the Indians had disappeared from around the observing tent; they left off
fishing on the river banks; all employments were discontinued; and every
soul disappeared; nor was a sound heard throughout the village of 53
houses. The natives had been warned of what would take place, but doubted
the prediction. When it did occur they looked upon me as the cause of the
Sun’s being ‘very sick and going to bed.’ They were thoroughly alarmed,
and overwhelmed with an undefinable dread.”
A still more thrilling incident is thus recorded[163] of the eclipse of July
29, 1878, by a witness at Fort Sill, Indian Territory, U.S.:—
“On Monday last we were permitted to see the eclipse of the Sun in a
beautiful bright sky. Not a cloud was visible. We had made ample
preparation, laying in a stock of smoked glass several days in advance. It
was the grandest sight I ever beheld, but it frightened the Indians badly.
Some of them threw themselves upon their knees and invoked the Divine
blessing; others flung themselves flat on the ground, face downward; others

cried and yelled in frantic excitement and terror. Finally one old fellow
stepped from the door of his lodge, pistol in hand, and fixing his eyes on the
darkened Sun, mumbled a few unintelligible words and raising his arm took
direct aim at the luminary, fired off his pistol, and after throwing his arms
about his head in a series of extraordinary gesticulations retreated to his
own quarters. As it happened, that very instant was the conclusion of
totality. The Indians beheld the glorious orb of day once more peep forth,
and it was unanimously voted that the timely discharge of that pistol was
the only thing that drove away the shadow and saved them from the public
inconvenience that would have certainly resulted from the entire extinction
of the Sun.”
A certain Mr. F. Kerigan, in a book published in 1844, made the
following remarks on ancient Jewish ideas respecting eclipses:—
“The Israelites, like their benighted neighbours, esteemed an eclipse of
either luminary as a supernatural and inauspicious omen, which filled them
with the most gloomy and fearful apprehensions: as may fairly be deduced
from the 8th chapter of Ezekiel, v. 15: ‘Then he brought me to the door of
the Lord’s House, which was towards the N.; and, behold there sat women
weeping for Tammuz.’ Now Tammuz is the name under which Adonis was
known in Palestine: he was the favourite of Venus, or Astarte, the principal
goddess of the Philistines and Phœnicians. Being killed by a wild boar, the
prevailing superstition of the age induced the uninformed multitude to
believe that when the Moon was eclipsed, it was in complement to their
beloved goddess Venus or Astarte, who, concealed behind the full Moon, sat
weeping under a dark veil for the loss of her beloved Tammuz or
Adonis.”[164]
The African travellers, R. and J. Lander, have given[165] a graphic
account of what took place on the occasion of the eclipse of the Moon of
Sept. 2, 1830, as witnessed by themselves:—“The earlier part of the
evening had been mild, serene, and remarkably pleasant. The Moon had
arisen with uncommon lustre, and being at the full, her appearance was
extremely delightful. It was the conclusion of the holidays, and many of the
people were enjoying the delicious coolness of a serene night, and resting
from the laborious exertions of the day; but when the Moon became
gradually obscured, fear overcame every one. As the eclipse increased they

became more terrified. All ran in great distress to inform their sovereign of
the circumstance, for there was not a single cloud to cause so deep a
shadow, and they could not comprehend the nature or meaning of an
eclipse.... Groups of men were blowing on trumpets, which produced a
harsh and discordant sound; some were employed in beating old drums,
others again were blowing on bullocks’ horns.... The diminished light, when
the eclipse was complete, was just sufficient for us to distinguish the
various groups of people, and contributed in no small degree to render the
scene more imposing. If a European, a stranger to Africa, had been placed
on a sudden in the midst of the terror-struck people, he would have
imagined himself to be among a legion of demons, holding a revel over a
fallen spirit.”

Footnotes:
[159] Bibliographie Astronomique. Paris, 1803. Indexed at p. 938.
[160] Authentic Account of an Embassy to China, by Sir G. Staunton.
[161] Fourth Series, vol. v. p. 676. October 24, 1868.
[162] Report U.S. Coast Survey, 1869, p. 179.
[163] Letter published in the Philadelphia Inquirer.
[164] A Practical Treatise on Eclipses, p. 2.
[165] Journal of an Expedition to Explore the Niger, vol. i. p. 366.

CHAPTER XIX.
ECLIPSES IN SHAKESPEARE AND THE POETS.

The sound of these words may be large but facts do not bear out the theory,
for eclipses do not appear to have captivated our great poets to anything like
the extent that Moon, Stars, and Comets have done.
Shakespeare has a few allusions to eclipses, but they are not of prime
importance. In Macbeth we find:—

“And slips of yew
Shivered in the Moon’s eclipse”
—Act iv. sc. 1.

the precise meaning of which is not very obvious. “Shivered” of course
means divided into pieces, but the idea intended is obscure.
The next quotation is more comprehensive and reflects more plainly the
current of thought prevalent in Shakespeare’s day, albeit here again the
word “eclipse” will be found to stand without much definite connection
with what goes before. However the reader shall judge for himself:—
“As stars with trains of fire and dews of blood,
Disasters in the Sun; and the moist star,
Upon whose influence Neptune’s Empire stands,
Was sick almost to doomsday with eclipse.”
—Hamlet, act i. sc. 1.

In King Lear we seem to come upon something very definitely historical,
but I am not able to say what it is. The Earl of Gloster says:—
“These late eclipses in the Sun and Moon portend no good to us.”

With this, Edmund, Gloster’s son, apparently agrees, for he exclaims:—
“These eclipses do portend these divisions.”
—Act i. sc. 2.

In Othello, the Moor of Venice himself, in a moment of excitement, says:
—
“O, insupportable! O, heavy hour!
Methinks it should be now a huge eclipse
Of Sun and Moon, and that the affrighted globe
Should yawn at alteration.”
—Act v. sc. 2.

In Anthony and Cleopatra we find Anthony expressing what our
forefathers so often thought in connection with astronomical matters:—
“Alack, our terrine Moon is now eclipsed;
And it portends alone
The fall of Anthony!”
—Act iii. sc. 11.

Milton has an allusion to an eclipse of the Sun which possesses a two-
fold interest—intrinsic and extrinsic. The former feature will be self-evident
when the passage is read. The poet, in describing[166] the faded splendour of
the fallen archangel, compares him to the Sun seen under circumstances
which have temporarily deprived it of its normal brilliancy and glory:—
“As when the Sun new-risen
Looks through the horizontal misty air
Shorn of his beams, or, from behind the Moon
In dim eclipse, disastrous twilight sheds
On half the nations, and with fear of change
Perplexes Monarchs.”

It has been well said by Dr. Orchard[167] that “this passage affords us an
example of the sublimity of Milton’s imagination and of his skill in
adapting the grandest phenomena of nature to the illustration of his
subject.”
What I alluded to in saying that extrinsic interest attached to this
quotation, is the fact that these lines might have caused the suppression of
the poem as a whole. Mrs. Todd puts the matter thus:—“Paradise Lost was
begun probably in 1658, although not finished until 1663, nor its thorough
revision completed until 1665. The censorship still existed, and Tomkyns
(one of the chaplains through whom the Archbishop gave or refused
license), although a broader-minded man than many of his day, found this
passage especially objectionable. The poem was allowed to see the light
only through the interposition of a friend of Milton. Upon such slender
chances may hang the life of an incomparable work of art! But it is easy to
see that in the turbulent days when Charles the Second had returned to
power, after the death of Cromwell, these lines should have been deemed
dangerously suggestive, in imputing to monarchs ‘perplexity’ and ‘fear of
change.’”
Other allusions to eclipses by Milton will be found as follows:—
Through the air she comes,
“Lur’d with the smell of infant blood, to dance
With Lapland witches, while the labouring Moon
Eclipses at their charms.”
—Paradise Lost, Bk. ii. lines 663-6.

“So saying, he dismiss’d them; they with speed
Their course through thickest constellation held,

Spreading their bane; the blasted stars look’d wan,
And planets, planet-struck, real eclipse,
Then suffer’d.”
—Paradise Lost, Bk. x. lines 410-14.

“O dark, dark, dark, amid the blaze of Noon,
Irrecoverably dark, total eclipse,
Without all hope of day!”
—Samson Agonistes, Lines 80-2.

“It was that fatal and perfidious bark,
Built in th’ eclipse, and rigg’d with curses dark,
That sunk so low that sacred heart of thine.”
—Lycidas, Lines 100-2.

Pope, in the following lines, may be presumed to mean that the covering
up of the Sun by the Moon, during a total eclipse, results in the Moon
becoming visible, at the cost of the Sun’s disappearance:—
“For Envy’d wit, like Sol eclips’d, makes known
Th’ opposing body’s grossness, not its own.”
—Essay on Criticism, Lines 469-70.

I have not attempted to pursue this matter through the pages of our
modern poets, but it is not unlikely that Scott and Tennyson (especially)
would have something on the subject of eclipses.

Footnotes:
[166] Paradise Lost, Book i., lines 594-9.
[167] The Astronomy of Milton, p. 259.

CHAPTER XX.
BRIEF HINTS TO OBSERVERS OF ECLIPSES OF THE SUN.

A few words (they must be few for lack of space) may usefully be added,
by way of advice, to persons proposing to choose a suitable locality at
which to station themselves for viewing a total eclipse of the Sun. To begin
with, of course they ought to get as close as possible to the central line, say
within 10 or 20 miles at the most; this matter settled, the next important
point is to find out where the duration of the totality will be longest,
coupled with the Sun at its maximum elevation above the horizon (to
escape the influence of mists and fogs). No advice, properly so-called, can
be given on these points, because they depend on the special circumstances
of every eclipse, and must be ascertained ad hoc from the Nautical
Almanac.
In anticipation of a forthcoming eclipse, it is very important to know
beforehand the probabilities of weather. If the locus in quo of an expected
eclipse is in a civilised country, there will generally not be much difficulty
in obtaining a certain amount of information as to this 6 or 12 months in
advance. But inasmuch as total eclipses of the Sun, and often the best of
them, are visible only in uncivilised countries or over trackless wastes, the
problem becomes a complicated and anxious one. In such cases it is
exceedingly desirable, where competent observers (including money) are
available, that preliminary notes of weather should be made for a year or
even two years in advance. There is in one sense no difficulty as to this, for
all the mathematical local elements of every eclipse are always made public
three or four years in advance through the pages of books like the Nautical
Almanac, the Connaissance des Temps, the Berliner Jahrbuch, &c. One
difficulty always confronts every eclipse expedition. If an out-of-the-way
part of the world has to be visited, accessible by sea, transport from

England, say, to the foreign shore is not usually a matter of difficulty,
because Government ships are often placed at the disposal of astronomers.
But the gravest difficulties often have to be faced after the arrival at the
foreign shore, and for this reason. Every sea coast is, as a general rule
applicable to the whole world, bad for astronomical observations. The
problem then which has to be solved is, how best to get away from the coast
inland to a high hill, and to find the means of transporting thither heavy
packing-cases of instruments, personal luggage, creature comforts, and, if
needs be, tents and the other accessories of camp life. Let not the reader of
either sex take fright at the idea of sleeping under a tent. I speak with
considerable experience when I say that, given fine or fairly fine weather,
nothing is more enjoyable in a temperate climate. Under the term “creature
comforts” I mean such things as tinned soups and preserved provisions
which nowadays can so easily be purchased everywhere in England, and of
such good quality. I would recommend these being taken even when the
eclipse traveller expects to be lodged in the dwelling-places of civilised
nations. Of course, if in order to see his eclipse he has to go into the wilds
of America, Asia, or Africa, he must start fully equipped with all those
personal impedimenta which will be found scheduled in the books
mentioned in the footnote.[168]

Footnotes:
[168] The Tourists’ Pocket-Book, 1s. (Philip); F. Galton’s Art of Travel, 7s. 6d.
(Murray); Royal Geographical Society’s Hints to Travellers, 5s. (R. G. S., Savile
Row). &c.

CHAPTER XXI.
TRANSITS AND OCCULTATIONS.

No book professing to deal with eclipses would be complete without a few
words of mention of “transits” and “occultations.” A transit is the passing of
a primary planet across the Sun, or of a secondary planet (i.e. satellite)
across its primary, whilst an occultation is the concealment of a star by the
Moon, or of a secondary planet (i.e. satellite) by its primary. A little thought
given to this definition will make it clear that a transit is essentially the
same in principle as an eclipse of the Sun by the Moon—one body comes in
front of another, and the former conceals in succession parts of the latter.
Practically the word “transit” in this connection is more especially
applied to passages of the inferior planets, Mercury and Venus, across the
Sun, or of the satellites of Jupiter across the disc of Jupiter, whilst the word
“occultation” more particularly calls to mind the concealment of a star
(apparently a little body) by the Moon (apparently a big body) or of a
satellite of Jupiter (a little body) by Jupiter (a big body), the star and the
satellite in each respective case passing behind the occulting body and
being concealed for a shorter or longer time. Commonly the occulted body
will remain hidden for an hour or two, more or less. In the case of Jupiter
the satellites of that planet may also, on occasions, be seen to undergo
eclipse in the shadow cast by Jupiter itself. An eclipse of a Jovian satellite is
therefore on all fours in principle the same as an eclipse of the Moon,
caused, as we know, by the Moon passing for a short time into the dark
shadow cast by the Earth. The conditions just laid down in respect of Jupiter
and its satellites also find a counterpart in the case of the satellites of
Saturn, but whilst these phenomena are incessantly occurring and visible in
the case of Jupiter, they are exceedingly rare in the case of Saturn owing to

its greater distance and the difficulty of seeing most of its satellites because
of their small apparent size.
Having regard to the circumstance that transits of Mercury and Venus
only happen at intervals of many years, it is not worth while for the
purposes of this work to devote any great amount of space to them. In point
of fact, whilst the next three transits of Mercury are as remote as 1907,
1914 and 1924, there will be no transit of Venus at all during the 20th
century; not another indeed until A.D. 2004.
From the standpoint of an amateur astronomer the various phenomena
which attend the movements of the satellites of Jupiter, constitute an
endless variety of interesting scenes, which are the more deserving of
attention in that they can be followed with the aid of a telescope of very
moderate size and capabilities.[169]

Fig. 15-16.—OCCULTATION OF JUPITER,
AUG. 7, 1889 (Immersion)

Occultations of planets and stars by the Moon may also be recommended
to the notice of the owners of small telescopes as events which are
constantly happening and which may be readily observed. The Moon being
rapidly in motion it will happen in point of fact that stars are occulted by it,
one may say every day, but of course the Moon’s light entirely blots out the
smaller stars and only those as large as, say, about the 5th magnitude are as
a rule worth trying to see in this connection. A table of the occultations of
such stars, copied from the Nautical Almanac, will be found in such
almanacs as Whitaker’s and the British. If such a table is consulted it will be
found that never does a lunation pass without a few stars being noted as
undergoing occultation, and now and then a planet. An occultation of a
planet is obviously still more interesting than that of a star.

Fig. 17-18.—OCCULTATION OF
JUPITER, AUG. 7, 1889
(Emersion).

From the epoch of New to Full Moon the Moon moves with its dark edge
foremost from the epoch of Full to New with its illuminated edge foremost.
During therefore the first half of a lunation the objects occulted disappear at
the dark edge and reappear at the illuminated edge, during the second half
of a lunation things are vice versâ. The most interesting time for watching
occultations is with a young Moon no more than, say, from 2 to 6 days old,
because under such circumstances the star occulted is suddenly
extinguished at a point in the sky where there seems nothing to interfere
with it.

Footnotes:
[169] For details as to these matters, see my Handbook of Astronomy, 4th ed.,
vol. i. pp. 186-196.

APPENDIX.
THE TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN OF MAY 28, 1900.

This Appendix deals solely with geographical and transport matters as to
which accurate information is not easily obtainable, the European locus in
quo of the Eclipse being in the benighted and somewhat untravelled
countries of Portugal and Spain.
The intending Eclipse excursionist must first make his choice between
(practically) a journey of all sea or of all land. The several sea routes are
one and all very much cheaper than any possible land journey, and almost
as quick in point of time, with the minimum amount of personal knocking
about. But (some persons will say) sea is sea, and so it is. On the other hand
the land journey is exceedingly expensive; and beyond France the trains are
very incommodious as regards hours, speed, and connections. Moreover,
there being more frontiers than one to cross, there are extra opportunities
for Custom-house squabbles, and Spain especially is famous for this sort of
thing.
As the Eclipse shadow will strike Europe in Portugal and quit Europe in
Spain the intending traveller must first decide for himself whether he will
prefer to go to Portugal or Spain. This settled, he will have the choice of
several sea routes and, in particular, of two land routes. But before
considering these further it will be well to state what are the chief of the
various places which are available as observing stations for mixed
travelling parties of ladies and gentlemen who have no desire to rough it in
out-of-the-way parts of the country.
The line of central eclipse passes across the Peninsula diagonally from
N.W. to S.E. It enters Portugal on the coast not far from Oporto in latitude
40° 50′ N., longitude 8° 38′ W. of Greenwich. It quits Spain on the coast at

Cape Santa Pola, not far from Alicante, in latitude 38° 13′ N., longitude
0° 30′ W. At Ovar in Portugal (pop. 11,000), 23m. S. of Oporto the duration
of the total phase will be 1m. 33½s., and the Sun’s altitude at totality will be
42°. At Talavera de la Reina in Spain (pop. 9700) the duration will be 1m.
27½s., and the altitude 39°; whilst at Alicante (pop. 40,000) the duration
will be still less, 1m. 19s., and the Sun’s altitude only 34°. The three towns
of Ovar, Talavera and Alicante are selected Nautical Almanac Eclipse
stations, for which special calculations have been made.
Hotel accommodation may be had at all the foregoing places, Oporto,
Ovar, Talavera and Alicante, as will be stated later on, but the Hotels at
Ovar and Talavera are not of much account.
Other towns more or less handy for the central line are few in number,
and as a rule deficient in lodging accommodation conforming to the English
standard. Amongst such possible alternative places the following may be
named (in order of position from N.W. to S.E.) as accessible by railway:—
Vizeu (pop. 7000; hotels, Mabilia, Cadite), on a branch of the Beira Alta
Railway 31m. from Santa Comba Dao Junction, which itself is 88m. from
Oporto.
Mangualde (pop. 3000), on the Beira Alta Railway, 115m. from Oporto,
and 49m. from Pampilhosa Junction.
Plasencia (pop. 6000; hotel, F. de Eusebio Sierra), 6m. N. of the station
of that name on the Lisbon and Madrid Railway.
Navalmoral (pop. 3300, buffet), a station on the Lisbon and Madrid
Railway about 8m. W. of the central line of eclipse.
Urda, a small station on the Madrid and Ciudad Real Railway, crossed
by the central line. The nearest accommodation would seem to be at Ciudad
Real (pop. 14,000; hotel, Baltasar Garcia), 33m. to the S.
Alcazar de San Juan Junction (pop. 8400; good buffet; hotel, Casa
Briseño). Alcazar is 92m. S. of Madrid; the central line crosses the railway
about 15m. to the S. of the town.

Tobarra (pop. 7500), a station on the Chinchilla and Cartagena Railway,
212m. S. of Madrid, and 115m. N. of Cartagena, lies about 6m. S. of the
central line.
Novelda (pop. 8000), a station on the Alicante and Madrid Railway, in a
beautiful valley about 20m. N. of Alicante.
In addition to the above places it must not be forgotten that both Oporto
at one end of the zone of totality and Alicante at the other are within the
track of the shadow, but the question of the meteorological conditions of the
atmosphere at these places (on the seaboard as they virtually are) has to be
considered.
A traveller from England to Portugal or Spain by sea has the following
choice of routes:—
1. Southampton to Oporto, fortnightly, on Fridays, by the steamers of the
“Royal Mail Steam Packet Co.” Fare, first-class return, about £11. Time,
about 54h. The return tickets are conveniently grouped in various ways, e.g.
Southampton to Oporto, and back from Vigo or Lisbon; or Southampton to
Lisbon and back, or back from Vigo (but not back from Oporto). Where the
booking is to Vigo, or Lisbon, of course the local railway fares have to be
paid in addition. Lisbon is 209m. S. of Oporto; Vigo, 110m. N. of Oporto.
One objection to making any use of Vigo is the extra Custom-house
formalities which have to be gone through on the frontier, and Spanish
Custom-house officials are specially objectionable.
2. Liverpool to Corunna, Carril, Vigo and Oporto, fortnightly, on
Thursdays, by the steamers of the “Pacific Steam Navigation Co.” Fares, to
the Spanish ports, first-class single, £6, 10s., return, £9, 15s.; second-class
single, £4. To the Portuguese ports, first-class single, £8, return, £12;
second-class single, £5. Time, about 4 to 5 days. This does not mean that
the steamers are very slow, but they call also at La Rochelle, in France.
3. London (Irongate Wharf) to Oporto, at intervals of 3 weeks, on
Thursdays, by the steamers of the “General Steam Navigation Co.” Fares,
first-class single, £4 (no return tickets issued; no second-class). The
steamers of this line are inferior to all the others.

4. London (Tilbury) to Gibraltar, weekly, on Thursdays, by the “P. & O.”
steamers. Fares, first-class single, £10, return, £16. Time, 4 to 5 days.
5. London (Tilbury) and Plymouth to Gibraltar, fortnightly, on Fridays,
by the steamers of the “Orient Co.” Fares and time the same as the
“P. & O.”
Travellers journeying to Oporto from England will probably not attempt
to do any more local sight-seeing than what can be readily accomplished by
simple railway trips in Portugal to or from Lisbon; but travellers landing at
Gibraltar will have it within their power to visit some of the important
towns of Southern Spain, such as Granada, Seville, Cordova, Toledo, Cadiz,
Malaga, &c.
An Eclipse excursionist who finds himself at Gibraltar, and who wishes
to avoid as much as possible land travelling in Spain by going on to
Alicante and stationing himself in that neighbourhood, must take shipping
locally at Gibraltar. There are Spanish steamer services from Gibraltar, and
Malaga, to Alicante.
An overland traveller to Spain (it is presumed that none such will go as
far as Portugal) has the choice of two routes to eclipse stations in Spain,
both starting from Paris:—(1) viâ Bordeaux, Hendaye, Vittoria, Burgos and
Medina del Campo, to Madrid, and thence either W. to Talavera (84m. from
Madrid), or S. towards Alcazar de San Juan (92m. from Madrid); (2) viâ
Lyons, Perpignan, Barcelona and Valencia to Alicante. The character of the
train service on the second of these routes is almost prohibitive, so that it is
almost a question of viâ Madrid or not at all.
The foregoing paragraphs will furnish the reader with an outline of the
whole problem of how to reach from England a suitable eclipse station in
the Peninsula. This outline will pave the way for further details as to land
journeys, which will be exhibited somewhat in the order of relative
complexity and expense, beginning with the simplest.

VIGO to OPORTO.

Chief stations and distances from Vigo:—Redondela (8m.), Guillarey
Junct. (24m.), Tuy (26m.), Vianna (57m.), Famalicao Junct. (88m.), Oporto
(108m.).
Vigo (pop. 17,000; hotel, Continental) is an important commercial centre
with fine scenery all round. Redondela is one of the prettiest towns in
Spain, especially as viewed from the railway viaducts. At Guillarey
carriages may have to be changed for Tuy, the last station in Spain and a
Custom-house. There is a fine cathedral at Tuy. The boundary is formed by
the river Minho, spanned by a magnificent bridge 400 yards long, railway
above and carriage road underneath. Crossing it the train enters the
Portuguese town of Valença, where there is a strong fortress and a custom-
house. Vianna (pop. 7000; hotel, Central). The river Lima is here spanned
by a double bridge (rail and road) 700 ft. long. From Famalicao there is a
loop line to Oporto running round the coast and 15m. longer than the main
line. Ermezinde is the junction with the Spanish line to Barca d’Alva,
Salamanca and France.

OPORTO to OVAR and LISBON.

From Oporto to Lisbon by the direct line it is 211m. Fares—first, single,
£1, 11s.; second, single, £1, 3s. But forwards from Pampilhosa (66m.) there
is a loop line to Lisbon, running along the coast, and 25m. longer than the
direct line. If it is proposed to visit some of the sights which will be
mentioned presently, the coast line must be taken.
Chief stations between Oporto and Lisbon by the coast line:—Ovar
(23m.), Pampilhosa Junct. (66m.), Figueira da Foz (92m.), Leiria (132m.),
Torres Vedras (192m.), Lisbon, Rocio station, (236m.).
Oporto (pop. 120,000; hotels, Grande Hotel do Porto, Hotel de Paris) is
a busy commercial city with much English colouring; e.g. church, hospital,
doctor, club, and full modern facilities for locomotion by tramways, cabs
and excursion carriages. The chief sights are:—(1) Cathedral, (2) Bishop’s
Palace, (3) Church of St. Francisco, (4) Palacio da Bolsa, (5) Museu
Portuense, (6) Museu Industrial, (7) Crystal Palace and Gardens, (8) Bridge
of Don Luiz I., and (9) Convent immortalised by Wellington in 1809 when
he made his celebrated “Passage of the Douro.” The port for Oporto where

the steamers from England load and discharge is Leixões, about 4m. to the
W., with a service of trains and trams into the city.
Ovar.—This town being the nearest eclipse centre to England may be
expected to draw many travellers in 1900. Being only 22m. or 1½ hours
from Oporto, a day trip may be made thither from Oporto, and this will suit
the convenience of those who prefer for lodgings a large city to a small
provincial town. A train from Oporto at 7 a.m. returning at 7.45 p.m. will
suffice for the requirements of all who will go armed only with small
instruments.
Pampilhosa Junction (Good Hotel).—Within 10m. to the N.-E. of this
station is the first of the special sights which can be seen in connection with
the Oporto-Lisbon railway. Take the train from Pampilhosa to Luzo (6m.),
omnibus thence (½ hour) to Busaco (Good Hotel), and see the battlefield,
the site of one of Wellington’s least successful victories. The panoramic
views in all directions are superb. The famous convent is now a
Government School of Forestry. After seeing Busaco progress may be made
to Figueira da Foz (38m. from Luzo—Good Hotel), where the tourist may
pass the night, unless he prefers to stay at Pampilhosa. Figueira is a seaside
bathing-place of repute on a branch line.
Leiria (pop. 3000, Novo Hotel).—Stay here two nights in order to have
the whole of the intervening day available for a circular tour by road to the
Dominican Monastery at Batalha (7m.), and to the Cistercian Monastery at
Alcobaça (13m. from Batalha, and also 13m. from Leiria). The Batalha
Monastery (built 1388-1515) is by common consent the finest piece of
architecture in Portugal. The Alcobaça Monastery, the largest in the world,
is of earlier date (1148-1222). The ch., 360 ft. long, is the most interesting
example of early Christian art in Portugal, whilst the cloisters are reputed to
be amongst the finest in Europe. Refreshments must be taken by the
traveller, for none can be procured during the drive. Vallado is really the
nearest station to Alcobaça (3m.), but there is no sleeping accommodation
there.
Lisbon (pop. 250,000; hotels—Braganza, Avenida, and some adjoining
the railway station) owing to its great length from E. to W., and narrow
breadth from N. to S., is a less easy city to find one’s way in than many

other cities. This difficulty is aggravated by the want of leading
thoroughfares and an efficient system of street naming and numbering. The
sights are the usual ones of every large Continental city, such as churches,
museums, and picture galleries; e.g. the Church of San Roque, the Church
of San Vincente with its remarkable Royal Mortuary Chapel, the church and
convent at Belem, and the gardens of the Escola Polytechnica. But a day
should certainly be set apart for a trip to Cintra (17m. by rail, trains about
every hour). The town (pop. 5000, hotel—Lawrence’s) is 1800 ft. above the
sea. See the Royal or Moorish Palace in the town, the beautiful Pena Palace
and grounds, and the gardens of Sir F. Cook at Villa Montserrate (3m).
These last are open daily to visitors who write their names at the entrance
lodge. About 15 miles from Cintra is Mafra, with a palace, convent, and
church of wonderful magnificence. An Eclipse excursionist planning a
time-table for sight-seeing between Oporto and Lisbon inclusive, and with
the intention of returning to England from Lisbon, must remember that the
Royal Mail Company’s boats only sail fortnightly (on Tuesdays or
Wednesdays) from Lisbon. The boats anchor in the river, and are reached by
a steam tender.

OPORTO to PARIS.

This route for getting from or to possible eclipse stations in Northern
Spain or Portugal is set out on the supposition that a certain number of
Eclipse excursionists may wish to combine the Paris Exhibition with the
eclipse. There is an International Express from Oporto (and Lisbon) every
Tuesday and Friday, which does the journey to Paris in 40 hours, but no one
travelling for pleasure would use this train, especially as much of the best
scenery is traversed by night.
The journey should therefore be performed in sections, which may be
made up as follows:—
Miles.
Oporto to Salamanca viâ Pampilhosa 269
Salamanca to Burgos 150
Burgos to Biarritz 186
Biarritz to Paris 493

Use should be made as far as possible of the International Express. Where
this is not done, and ordinary trains have to be taken, the delays are
interminable and the combinations most exasperating to an Englishman.
The hotel accommodation in all the smaller towns of Spain is so universally
bad that it is not easy to suggest what otherwise would seem obvious,
namely, how best to subdivide, at any rate, the first three of the above
sections.
The International Express has a connection with Lisbon, the main train
being made up or divided as the case may be at Pampilhosa Junction.

LISBON to TALAVERA and MADRID.

Observers who think they will be able to do better as regards a clear sky
inland in Spain than near either the coast of Portugal or that of Spain will
still find in many cases that Lisbon is their most convenient port for
landing.
The chief stations on this route are:—Entroncamento Junction (67m.),
Marvão (149m.), Valencia de Alcantara (159m.), *Plasencia (256m.),
*Navalmoral (287m.), *Talavera de la Reina (328m.), Madrid, Delicias
Stat. (412m.). The places marked (*) are all within the shadow track of the
eclipse.
Entroncamento (Good Buffet) is the junction station for the lines N. to
Oporto and S.-E. to Badajos and most trains wait here: 8m. beyond, the
Tagus is crossed by a fine bridge commanding good views.
Marvão (Custom-house) is the last station in Portugal but the actual
frontier is 6m. further on. Valencia de Alcantara (Custom-house) is the
first station in Spain. During the next 50m. the railway passes through much
wild mountain scenery.
Plasencia, Navalmoral, and Talavera as eclipse stations have been
mentioned on a previous page. Many celebrated struggles during the
Peninsular War took place in this part of Spain, notably at Talavera in 1809
and at Almaraz in 1812.
Madrid (pop. 470,000; Hotel de Paris, Hotel de la Paix).

GIBRALTAR to MADRID (with Excursions, on the way, to GRANADA
and SEVILLE).

From Algeçiras (opposite Gibraltar) there runs every Wednesday an
International Express train to Madrid and Paris. The eclipse central line
crosses this route about 15m. S. of Alcazar de San Juan Junction (pop.
8400; Good Buffet, Hotel, Casa Briseño) which is 368m. N. of Algeçiras
and 93m. S. of Madrid.
The chief stations between Algeçiras and Madrid are:—Bobadilla Junct.
(110m.), Cordova (185m.), Alcazar de San Juan (369m.), Aranjuez (430m.),
and Madrid (461m.).
Bobadilla is a double junction. A line runs thence E. to Granada (75m.),
and W. to Seville (104m.). A traveller visiting Granada must return to
Bobadilla to get to Seville, but from Seville he can rejoin the main line at
Cordova 75m. N. of Bobadilla, and avoid Bobadilla. From Seville to
Cordova is 81m.
Algeçiras is reached from Gibraltar by a local steamer. About one hour is
allowed to make the connection with the train. Eclipse travellers going to
this part of Spain who wish to take advantage of their proximity to Granada
and Seville will find the following time-table usefully suggestive:—
May 16, W. Gibraltar to Granada, 8 a.m. to 8 p.m.
" 17, T. At Granada.
" 18, F. At Granada.
" 19, S. Granada to Seville, 7 a.m. to 6 p.m.
" 20, Sun. At Seville.
" 21, M. At Seville.
" 22, Tu. Seville to Cordova, 11 a.m. to 3 p.m.
" 23, W. At Cordova.
" 24, T. Cordova to Alcazar, 2 a.m. to 3 p.m.
" 25, F. At Alcazar.
" 26, S. At Alcazar.
" 27, Sun. At Alcazar.
" 28, M. Eclipse day.

Corresponding to the above International train there is an express from
Paris on Mondays reaching Algeçiras on Wednesdays. This, of course,
might suit the convenience of Eclipse travellers proposing to go to Spain
viâ France, and perhaps return viâ Gibraltar. The time occupied by the
International train between Paris and Algeçiras and vice versâ is about 49
hours.

LONDON to ALICANTE.

The central line of the eclipse quits Spain at Cape Santa Pola about 10m.
S. of Alicante (pop. 40,000): it crosses the line of the Alicante and Madrid
railway at Novelda (pop. 8000) a station about 20m. inland from Alicante.
Alicante may be reached from England as follows:—(1) All sea, viâ
Gibraltar and Malaga; (2) all land, viâ Paris, Biarritz and Madrid (1077m.),
or Paris, Lyons and Perpignan (1126m.); or (3) part land and part sea, viâ
Paris and Marseilles, and thence by steamer to Barcelona and Valencia.
As regards the two land routes there is not very much to choose except
that the Biarritz-Madrid route is somewhat shorter and much quicker than
the Perpignan-Barcelona route. As regards the two sea routes both are
probably bad from the standpoint of comfort, the steamers in which the
voyage would have to be completed being Spanish coasting vessels, but it is
difficult to obtain particulars of them in England.
The following are some of the chief places between Paris and Alicante on
the Perpignan route:—Dijon (195m.), Lyons (318m.), Avignon (461m.),
Nîmes (490m.), Perpignan (623m.), Spanish frontier at Port Bou (650m.),
Barcelona (758m.), Tarragona (825m.), Valencia (997m.), Alicante
(1126m.). The journey from Paris to Barcelona is accomplished in 23h. by
the International Express: the remaining 368 miles take 27 hours owing to
the bad connections of the trains.
Madrid is 285m. from Alicante, the journey occupying about 29h.

USEFUL BOOKS for PORTUGAL and SPAIN.

As the result of much inquiry and research, the following may be
suggested:—

Guide-books.

Handbook for Spain, 2 vols. 20s. (J. Murray.)
Handbook to Spain and Portugal, Dr. Charnock. 7s. 6d. (W. J. Adams.)
Guide to Spain and Portugal, O’Shea and Lomas. 15s. (A. & C. Black.)
Handbook for Portugal. 12s. (J. Murray.)

Dictionaries.

Jäschke, R. English-Spanish Conversation Dictionary. 3s. 6d. (Nutt.)
Castro De La Fayette. Novo Diccionario Inglez-Portugueze. 2 vols. 6s.

Grammars and Phrase Books.

D’Orsey, Rev. A. J. D. Colloquial Portuguese. 3s. 6d. (Kegan Paul.)
Wall, C. H. Practical Portuguese Grammar. 7s. (Nutt.)
Thimm, C. A. Spanish Self-taught. 1s. 6d. (Marlborough.)
Spanish Conversation Book. 1s. (Walter Scott.)
Hugo. Spanish Simplified. 2 Parts and Key. 1s. 6d. (1A Paternoster Row.)

Various.

Chambers, G. F. The Tourist’s Pocket-Book. [Vocabulary of 16
Languages]. 1s. (Philip.)
Thimm, C. A. Spanish Washing Lists for both Sexes. 6d. (Marlborough.)

DIAGRAM OF CONSPICUOUS STARS AND PLANETS LIKELY TO BE VISIBLE DURING
THE TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN, MAY 28, 1900.

INDEX.

⁂ The Eclipses referred to in the Chapters on History (VIII.-XIII.) are not,
as regards dates, dealt with in this Index.

A.

Aberdour, Lord, 159.
Agathocles, The Eclipse of, 120.
Ahaz, Dial of, 90, 96, 101.
Airy, Sir G. B., 48, 74, 83, 84, 89, 110, 111, 113, 115, 123, 124, 144, 164,
167.
Almanac, British, 219.
Almanac, Nautical, 26, 35, 234, 238.
Ammianus Marcellinus, 133.
Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, 136, 137, 138, 142, 143, 146, 148, 205, 206, 207,
208, 209.
Annales Fuldenses, 143, 207.
Annular Eclipses of the Sun, 16.
Apollonius of Tyana, 130.
Arabian Records, 132, 138.
Arago, 125, 164.
Archilochus, 108.
Aristophanes, 199.
Ascending Node, 18.

Asser, 144.

B.

Baily, F., 57, 112, 122, 164.
“Baily’s Beads,” 57, 64, 164.
Barker, Sir R., 102.
Bede, 205.
Beer, 217.
Bible, Eclipses mentioned in, 86.
Biot, E., 80.
“Black” Eclipses of the Moon, 189.
Blackness of the Moon during Solar Eclipses, 43.
Blake, 48.
Boillot, 135.
Bosanquet, J. W., 91, 95, 101.

C.

Calvisius, 133, 137, 146, 221.
Carlini, 164.
Carrington, R. C., 60.
Cassini, 158.
Caussin, 139.
Cedrenus, 208.
Celoria, Prof., 150.
Chinese Eclipses of the Sun, 75.
—— of the Moon, 197.

Chromosphere, 60.
Chronicon Scotorum, 143.
Churton, Archdeacon, 210.
Cicero, 108, 109, 118.
Classical History, Eclipses mentioned in, 107.
Clavius, 64, 152.
Columbus, 211.
Confucius, 81.
Conjunction of the Moon, 31.
Copper colour of Moon in Lunar Eclipses, 192.
Corona, 56, 62, 105, 130, 144, 157, 159, 161, 168, 169.
Coronium, 69.
Crabtree, W., 215.
Crucifixion, The darkness at, 129.

D.

Delambre, 81.
De La Rue, W., 168.
De Louville, 158.
Descending Node, 18.
Dial of Ahaz, 90, 96, 101.
Digit explained, 28.
Diodorus Siculus, 120.
Diogenes Laërtius, 94.
Dion Cassius, 128, 130.
Draconic Month, 20.
Dreyer, J. L. E., 221.

Du Sèjour, 37, 39.

E.

Earthquakes and Eclipses, 75.
Earth-shine, 61.
Eclipsareon, Ferguson’s, 222.
Eclipse, Derivation of the word, 11.
——, number of in a year, 13.
—— of the Moon, 11.
—— of the Sun, 11.
——, Theory of, 15.
Eclipse of the Sun of May 28, 1900, 9, 40, 66, 71, 239.
Ennius, 118.

F.

Ferguson, J., 215, 221.
Ferrer, Don J., 163.
Flamsteed, J., 155, 215.
Florence of Worcester, 143.
Forster, 192.
Freeman, Prof. E. A., 146.
Full Moon, 13.

G.

Gassendi, P., 215, 221.

Gaubil, 80.
Gemma Frisius, 152.
Gilliss, Lieut. J. M., 168.
Ginzel, 75, 131.
Glaber, 145, 208.
Glycas, 92.
Grant, R., 131.
Graydon, 174.
Gregorius Turonensis, 135.

H.

Hagen, 163.
Halley, E., 148, 157.
Hansen’s Lunar Tables, 89, 118, 119, 124.
Helium, 69.
Helps, Sir A., 211.
Herodotus, 109, 114, 116.
Herschel, Sir J., 217.
Herschel, Sir W., 161, 162.
Hevelius, 215.
Hezekiah, King of Judah, 90.
Hinckes, Dr., 89.
Hind, J. R., 38, 80, 89, 115, 116, 125, 138, 142, 143, 147, 148, 151, 153,
154, 167, 203, 204.
Hitzig, 87.
Homer’s Iliad quoted, 126.
Homer’s Odyssey quoted, 94, 126.

Huggins, Sir W., 131.
Humboldt, A. Von, 133, 142, 217.
Hunter, W., 102.

I.

Ideler, 81.

J.

Janssen, 169.
Jesuit Missionaries in China, 81, 95.
Johnson, Rev. S. J., 38, 80, 128, 131, 133, 135, 137, 138, 142, 144, 145,
150, 202, 210, 216, 222.
Jones, Capt. F., 113.
Josephus, 202.
Justin, 121.

K.

Kepler, 64, 152, 153, 213, 214, 220.
Kerigan, F., 227.
Kirchoff, 69.

L.

Lalande, J. De, 224.
Lander, R. and J., 228.

Langley, Prof., 171.
Lardner, D., His Hand-book of Astronomy cited, 12.
Lassell, W., 167.
Layard, Sir A. H., 113.
Leon of Corfu, 144.
Le Verrier’s Solar Tables, 89.
Lewis, Sir G. C., 110.
Liais, E., 44.
Limits, Lunar Ecliptic, 190.
Lingard, Dr., 150.
Livy, 125, 202.
Lockyer, Sir N., 178.
Lynn, W. T., 115, 131.

M.

Macartney, Lord, his Embassy to China, 224.
Maclaurin, 151, 153, 159.
Mädler, 217.
Magnitude of an Eclipse, 29.
Main, Rev. R., 88.
Maraldi, 158.
Matthew Paris, 210.
Maunder, E. W., 104, 106.
Meteorological effects of a solar eclipse, 54, 167.
Millosevich, 109.
Milton, J., 231.
Moon, Eclipses of, 186.

N.

Nautical Almanac, 26, 35, 234, 238.
Newcomb, S., 119, 127, 139, 144, 171.
Newcomb, S., His Astronomy cited, 26.
New Moon, 13.
Newton, Sir I., 198.
Nicias, 199.
Nineveh Tablets, 89.
Nodes, 18, 19, 30.

O.

Occultations, 10, 12, 235, 237.
Ockley, S., 138.
Oltmanns, 112.
Oppolzer, T. Von, His Canon cited, 35, 109, 218.
Opposition of the Moon, 31.
Orchard, Dr., 231.

P.

Partial Eclipses of the Sun, 17.
Pekin, Observatory at, 95.
Penumbra in Lunar Eclipses, 188.
Pepys, S., His Diary cited, 155.
Perry, S. J., 177, 193.
Philostorgius, 134.
Philostratus, 130.

Pickering, E. H., 184.
Pingré, 219.
Planets, Primary, 12.
——, Secondary, 12.
——, Visibility of during Eclipses, 61.
Pliny, 126, 200, 204, 213.
Plutarch, Lives, 108, 115, 117, 120, 126, 131, 199, 200, 201.
Polybius, 200.
Pope, A., 94, 233.
Powell, Sir G. B., 178.
Prominences, 59.
Pusey, Dr. E. B., 87, 88.

R.

Rawlinson, Sir H. C., 88, 111.
Red Flames, 59, 156, 159, 168.
Ricciolus, J. B., 220, 222.
Roger of Wendover, 149, 210.
Roger de Hoveden, 205.
Rothmann, R. W., 77.
Rümker, 48.
Russell, S. M., 78, 79, 198, 225.

S.

Santini, 164.
“Saros,” The, 14, 18, 112, 157.

Schnurrer, 142.
Schuster, 172.
Season of Eclipses, 29.
Seneca, 126.
Shadow Bands, 46.
Shadow of Moon on Earth, 36, 41, 49, 73.
Shakespeare, W., 229.
Smith, J. D., 48.
Smyth, Admiral W. H., 217.
Short, J., 159.
Suetonius, 126.
Snooke, W. D., 223.
Spain, Eclipse of 1900 visible in, 10.
Spots on the Sun, 67, 69.
Stannyan, Capt., 60, 156.
Staunton, Sir G., 224.
Stockwell, J. N., 131, 202, 223.
Stone, E. J., 193.
“Stiklastad,” “Eclipse of,” 144.
Struve, O., 164.
Struyck, N., 221.
Stukeley, Dr. W., 157, 160.

T.

Tacitus, 203.
Telegraph, Electric, and Eclipses, 179.
“Thales,” “Eclipse of,” 103, 109, 123.

Thirlwall, Bishop, 116.
Thucydides, 117, 118.
Tibullus, 126.
Todd, Mrs. D. T., her Total Eclipses cited, 25, 27, 50, 56, 65, 71, 136, 146,
173, 183, 223, 231.
Totality, Approach of, 49.
——, Darkness of, 53.
Transits, 10, 12, 235.
Trithenius, 204.
Trouvelot, 106.
Tycho Brahe, 137, 143, 150, 152, 213, 214, 220.

U.

Ulloa, Don A., 64, 161, 179.
Usher, Archbishop, 87.

V.

Valz, 164.

W.

Wallis, Dr., 155.
Wargentin, 216.
Wesley, W. H., 66.
William of Malmesbury, 145, 147.
Williams, J., 81, 82, 83, 85, 86.

Wolcott, Miss K. E., 106.
Wyberd, Dr., 154.

X.

Xenophon, 112, 113, 119.

Y.

Young, Prof., 178.

Z.

Zech, 119.

Transriber’s Note: The table below lists all corrections applied to the
original text.

p. 014: [removed extra hyphen] more than 18-years → 18 years
p. 023: Phillipines → Philippines
p. 027: occuring at regular intervals → occurring
p. 048: Rumker mentions that → Rümer
p. 059: every sufficiently skilled obersver → observer
p. 070: [added closing bracket] (SUN-SPOT MINIMUM.)
p. 154: [removed comma] Greenock and Elgin, were near
p. 217: in the Carribean Sea → Caribbean
p. 227: A certain Mr F. Kerigan → Mr. F. Kerigan
p. 230: [removed comma] As, stars with trains of fire
p. 241: Casa Brisẽno → Briseño
p. 244: Vienna (57m.) → Vianna
p. 249: [normalized] Plasentia (256m.) → Plasencia
p. 250: Casa Brisẽno → Briseño

*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE STORY OF
ECLIPSES ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.
Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license,
apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not
be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of
the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project
Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may
use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative
works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically
ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S.
copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or
any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic
work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept
all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If
you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom
you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people
who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the

collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in
the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works
in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project
Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with
the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format
with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it
without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which
the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase
“Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with

this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located
in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived
from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a
notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright
holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United
States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or
providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted
with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of
this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide
access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official

version posted on the official Project Gutenberg website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided
that:

• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the use of
Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you already use to
calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the owner of the Project
Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate royalties under this
paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty
payments must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns.
Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section
4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation.”

• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies you in
writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does not agree to
the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a
user to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical
medium and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of Project
Gutenberg™ works.

• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the electronic
work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of receipt of the
work.

• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution of
Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth
in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in
Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and
proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the
Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be
stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete,
inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -
Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party
distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this
agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and
expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE
FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it,
you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by
sending a written explanation to the person you received the work
from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return
the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that
provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a
replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to
give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu
of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a
refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If
any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law
of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability,
costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly
from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)

distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b) alteration,
modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work,
and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg

Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals
and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely
available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and
permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To
learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and
the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state
of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue
Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is
64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S.
federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza
#516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact

links and up to date contact information can be found at the
Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small
donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax
exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable
effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have
not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including
how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back

back